[ARM] Rework CPU feature selection in the disassembler
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1091Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1093
1094@item nodefaultlib
1095Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098@item nodelete
1099Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101@item nodlopen
1102Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104@item nodump
1105Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
6aa29e7b
JJ
1107@item noexecstack
1108Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
8dfef1bd
L
1110@item text
1111Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113@item notext
1114Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116@item textoff
1117Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
6aa29e7b
JJ
1119@item norelro
1120Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
cd6d6c15
NC
1122@item now
1123When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127first called.
1128
1129@item origin
1130Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
6aa29e7b
JJ
1132@item relro
1133Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
24718e3b
L
1135@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
04c3a755
NS
1141@item stack-size=@var{value}
1142Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
d258b828
IZ
1146@item bndplt
1147Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
889c2a67
L
1149@item noextern-protected-data
1150Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1151library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1152to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1153generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1154module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1155i386 and x86-64.
1156
cd6d6c15
NC
1157@end table
1158
ece2d90e 1159Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1160
1161@kindex -(
1162@cindex groups of archives
1163@item -( @var{archives} -)
1164@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1165The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1166either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1167
1168The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1169references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1170the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1171archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1172object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1173would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1174they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1175resolved.
1176
1177Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1178it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1179more archives.
1180
69da35b5
NC
1181@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1182@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1183@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1184@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1185Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1186recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1187and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1188the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1189behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1190so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1191restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1192
4a43e768
AM
1193@kindex --as-needed
1194@kindex --no-as-needed
1195@item --as-needed
1196@itemx --no-as-needed
1197This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1198on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1199the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1200on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1201needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1202emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1203non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1204the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1205non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1206Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1207the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1208needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1209from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1210
e56f61be
L
1211@kindex --add-needed
1212@kindex --no-add-needed
1213@item --add-needed
1214@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1215These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1216their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1217options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1218and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1219
252b5132
RH
1220@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1221@item -assert @var{keyword}
1222This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1223
1224@kindex -Bdynamic
1225@kindex -dy
1226@kindex -call_shared
1227@item -Bdynamic
1228@itemx -dy
1229@itemx -call_shared
1230Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1231for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1232default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1233for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1234multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1235@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1236
a1ab1d2a
UD
1237@kindex -Bgroup
1238@item -Bgroup
1239Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1240section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1241object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1242@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1243only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1244
252b5132
RH
1245@kindex -Bstatic
1246@kindex -dn
1247@kindex -non_shared
1248@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1249@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1250@itemx -dn
1251@itemx -non_shared
1252@itemx -static
1253Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1254platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1255variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1256may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1257library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1258option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1259option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1260shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1261references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1262libraries.
252b5132
RH
1263
1264@kindex -Bsymbolic
1265@item -Bsymbolic
1266When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1267definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1268for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1269within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1270platforms which support shared libraries.
1271
40b36307
L
1272@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1273@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1274When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1275symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1276This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1277libraries.
1278
55255dae
L
1279@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1280@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1281Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1282typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1283global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1284within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1285to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1286in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1287which support shared libraries.
1288
1289The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1290scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1291
40b36307
L
1292@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1293@item --dynamic-list-data
1294Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1295
1296@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1297@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1298Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1299is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1300
0b8a70d9
L
1301@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1302@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1303Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1304
252b5132
RH
1305@kindex --check-sections
1306@kindex --no-check-sections
1307@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1308@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1309Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1310been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1311perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1312suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1313allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1314restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1315Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1316force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1317option.
252b5132 1318
ddbb8a31
NC
1319@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1320@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1321@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1322@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1323This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1324by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1325command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1326output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1327input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1328specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1329follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1330behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1331
1332This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1333libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1334mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1335their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1336required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1337the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1338dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1339symbols.
1340
252b5132
RH
1341@cindex cross reference table
1342@kindex --cref
1343@item --cref
1344Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1345generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1346Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1347
1348The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1349easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1350sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1351symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1352definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1353where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1354symbol are listed.
252b5132 1355
4818e05f
AM
1356@cindex common allocation
1357@kindex --no-define-common
1358@item --no-define-common
1359This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1360The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1361@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1362
1363The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1364the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1365of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1366forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1367Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1368from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1369This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1370and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1371duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1372paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1373
252b5132 1374@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1375@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1376@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1377Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1378address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1379times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1380limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1381context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1382symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1383constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1384using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1385@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1386equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1387
1388@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1389@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1390@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1391@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1392@itemx --no-demangle
1393These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1394and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1395present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1396underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1397mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1398different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1399to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1400demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1401is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1402
1403@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1404@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1405@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1406@item -I@var{file}
1407@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1408Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1409generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1410linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1411doing.
1412
7ce691ae 1413@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1414@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1415@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1416@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1417Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1418with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1419
252b5132
RH
1420@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1421@item --force-exe-suffix
1422Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1423
1424If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1425@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1426the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1427option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1428Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1429it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1430
1431@kindex --gc-sections
1432@kindex --no-gc-sections
1433@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1434@item --gc-sections
1435@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1436Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1437targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1438performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1439@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1440
d5465ba2
AM
1441@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1442examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1443symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1444command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1445referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1446libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1447referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1448the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1449relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1450
ac69cbc6 1451This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1452@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1453specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1454a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1455
c17d87de
NC
1456@kindex --print-gc-sections
1457@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1458@cindex garbage collection
1459@item --print-gc-sections
1460@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1461List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1462printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1463collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1464default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1465be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1466line.
1467
30824704
RM
1468@kindex --print-output-format
1469@cindex output format
1470@item --print-output-format
1471Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1472other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1473in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1474
252b5132
RH
1475@cindex help
1476@cindex usage
1477@kindex --help
1478@item --help
1479Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1480
ea20a7da
CC
1481@kindex --target-help
1482@item --target-help
1483Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1484
2509a395
SL
1485@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1486@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1487Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1488@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1489
1490@cindex memory usage
1491@kindex --no-keep-memory
1492@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1493@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1494symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1495instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1496necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1497while linking a large executable.
1498
1499@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1500@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1501@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1502@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1503Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1504is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1505The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1506behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1507libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1508
aa713662
L
1509@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1510@kindex -z muldefs
1511@item --allow-multiple-definition
1512@itemx -z muldefs
1513Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1514report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1515first definition will be used.
1516
b79e8c78 1517@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1518@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1519@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1520@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1521Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1522This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1523determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1524shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1525how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1526
903249d7
NC
1527The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1528referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1529an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1530a shared library.
1531
1532The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1533libraries specified at link time are that:
1534
1535@itemize @bullet
1536@item
1537A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1538that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1539resolvable at load time.
1540@item
1541There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1542symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1543
1544The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1545select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1546architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1547appropriate memset function.
1548@end itemize
b79e8c78 1549
31941635
L
1550@kindex --no-undefined-version
1551@item --no-undefined-version
1552Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1553it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1554will be issued instead.
1555
3e3b46e5
PB
1556@kindex --default-symver
1557@item --default-symver
1558Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1559exported symbols.
1560
1561@kindex --default-imported-symver
1562@item --default-imported-symver
1563Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1564imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1565
252b5132
RH
1566@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1567@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1568Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1569files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1570been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1571This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1572errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1573have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1574inappropriate.
1575
fe7929ce
AM
1576@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1577@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1578Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1579library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1580
252b5132
RH
1581@kindex --no-whole-archive
1582@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1583Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1584archive files.
1585
1586@cindex output file after errors
1587@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1588@item --noinhibit-exec
1589Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1590Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1591errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1592when it issues any error whatsoever.
1593
0a9c1c8e
CD
1594@kindex -nostdlib
1595@item -nostdlib
1596Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1597command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1598(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1599
252b5132 1600@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1601@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1602@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1603@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1604file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1605@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1606object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1607object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1608should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1609usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1610name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1611list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1612command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1613this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1614@end ifclear
1615
36af4a4e
JJ
1616@kindex -pie
1617@kindex --pic-executable
1618@item -pie
1619@itemx --pic-executable
1620@cindex position independent executables
1621Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1622ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1623libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1624address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1625normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1626defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1627
252b5132
RH
1628@kindex -qmagic
1629@item -qmagic
1630This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1631
1632@kindex -Qy
1633@item -Qy
1634This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1635
1636@kindex --relax
1637@cindex synthesizing linker
1638@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1639@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1640@item --relax
28d5f677 1641@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1642An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1643@ifset GENERIC
1644This option is only supported on a few targets.
1645@end ifset
1646@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1647@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1648@end ifset
1649@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1650@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1651@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1652@ifset XTENSA
1653@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1654@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1655@ifset M68HC11
1656@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1657@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1658@ifset NIOSII
1659@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1660@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1661@ifset POWERPC
1662@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1663@end ifset
252b5132 1664
28d5f677
NC
1665On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1666global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1667addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1668synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1669instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1670
1671On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1672debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1673@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1674This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1675family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1676@end ifset
1677
1678@ifset GENERIC
1679On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1680but ignored.
1681@end ifset
1682
28d5f677
NC
1683On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1684@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1685
252b5132
RH
1686@cindex retaining specified symbols
1687@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1688@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1689@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1690@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1691Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1692discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1693symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1694@ifset GENERIC
1695(such as VxWorks)
1696@end ifset
1697where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1698run-time memory.
1699
1700@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1701or symbols needed for relocations.
1702
1703You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1704line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1705
1706@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1707@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1708@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1709@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1710Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1711linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1712arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1713them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1714also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1715objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1716@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1717ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1718@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1719
ff5dcc92 1720The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1721SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1722@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1723runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1724options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1725gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1726file systems.
252b5132 1727
ff5dcc92 1728For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1729followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1730the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1731@end ifset
1732
1733@ifset GENERIC
1734@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1735@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1736@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1737When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1738happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1739of the input files.
1740
1741When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1742non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1743shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1744explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1745specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1746@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1747either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1748appearing multiple times.
1749
28c309a2
NC
1750This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1751that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1752is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1753runtime linker would do.
1754
252b5132 1755The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1756libraries:
252b5132
RH
1757@enumerate
1758@item
ff5dcc92 1759Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1760@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1761Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1762between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1763specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1764used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1765at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1766by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1767the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1768@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1769On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1770@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1771environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1772@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1773On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1774directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1775@item
a1b8d843 1776For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1777variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1778@item
ec4eb78a
L
1779For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1780@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1781libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1782@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1783@item
252b5132
RH
1784The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1785@item
1786For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1787exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1788@end enumerate
1789
1790If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1791warning and continue with the link.
1792@end ifset
1793
1794@kindex -shared
1795@kindex -Bshareable
1796@item -shared
1797@itemx -Bshareable
1798@cindex shared libraries
1799Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1800and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1801shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1802undefined symbols in the link.
1803
252b5132 1804@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1805@item --sort-common
1806@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1807@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1808This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1809ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1810sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1811eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1812between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1813specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1814
2509a395
SL
1815@kindex --sort-section=name
1816@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1817This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1818patterns in the linker script.
1819
2509a395
SL
1820@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1821@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1822This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1823patterns in the linker script.
1824
252b5132 1825@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1826@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1827Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1828each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1829size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1830
1831@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1832@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1833Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1834output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1835This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1836certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1837cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1838that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1839support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1840input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1841more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1842many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1843
1844@kindex --stats
1845@item --stats
1846Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1847as execution time and memory usage.
1848
2509a395 1849@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1850@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1851Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1852configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1853that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1854
252b5132
RH
1855@kindex --traditional-format
1856@cindex traditional format
1857@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1858For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1859the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1860use the traditional format instead.
1861
1862@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1863For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1864symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1865full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1866@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1867trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1868combine duplicate entries.
1869
2509a395
SL
1870@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1871@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1872Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1873address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1874times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1875line.
1876@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1877for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1878@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1879should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1880sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1881
2509a395
SL
1882@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1883@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1884@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1885@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1886@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1887@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1888@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1889Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1890@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1891
2509a395
SL
1892@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1893@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1894@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1895When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1896byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1897
9d5777a3
RM
1898@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1899@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1900@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1901When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1902the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1903text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1904
0d705e9f
AM
1905@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1906@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1907@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1908When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1909model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1910
560e09e9
NC
1911@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1912@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1913Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1914values for @samp{method}:
1915
1916@table @samp
1917@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1918Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1919
1920@item report-all
da8bce14 1921Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1922
1923@item ignore-in-object-files
1924Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1925ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1926
1927@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1928Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1929ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1930when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1931libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1932command line.
1933@end table
1934
1935The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1936by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1937
1938Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1939unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1940can change this to a warning.
1941
1715a13c
L
1942@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1943@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1944@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1945@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1946Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1947supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1948the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1949argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1950
1951@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1952@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1953@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1954Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1955used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1956about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1957is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1958see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1959use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1960symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1961@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1962
7ce691ae 1963@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1964@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1965@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1966@item --warn-common
1967Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1968a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1969but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1970you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1971Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1972warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1973
1974There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1975
1976@table @samp
1977@item int i = 1;
1978A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1979file.
1980
1981@item extern int i;
1982An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1983There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1984variable somewhere.
1985
1986@item int i;
1987A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1988variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1989The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1990single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1991size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1992a definition of the same variable.
1993@end table
1994
1995The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1996Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1997just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1998encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1999a common symbol.
2000
2001@enumerate
2002@item
2003Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2004definition for the symbol.
2005@smallexample
2006@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2007 overridden by definition
2008@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2009@end smallexample
2010
2011@item
2012Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2013the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2014except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2015@smallexample
2016@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2017 overriding common
2018@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2019@end smallexample
2020
2021@item
2022Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2023@smallexample
2024@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2025 of `@var{symbol}'
2026@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2027@end smallexample
2028
2029@item
2030Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2031@smallexample
2032@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2033 overridden by larger common
2034@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2035@end smallexample
2036
2037@item
2038Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2039the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2040encountered in a different order.
2041@smallexample
2042@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2043 overriding smaller common
2044@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2045@end smallexample
2046@end enumerate
2047
2048@kindex --warn-constructors
2049@item --warn-constructors
2050Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2051object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2052detect the use of global constructors.
2053
2054@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2055@item --warn-multiple-gp
2056Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2057This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2058Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2059section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2060of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2061base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2062base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2063bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2064large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2065values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2066option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2067
2068@kindex --warn-once
2069@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2070@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2071@item --warn-once
2072Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2073which refers to it.
2074
3ea60775
NC
2075@kindex --warn-orphan
2076@kindex --no-warn-orphan
2077@cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2078@cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2079@item --warn-orphan
2080The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2081warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
2082output file. @xref{Orphan Sections} The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
2083option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2084sections.
2085
252b5132
RH
2086@kindex --warn-section-align
2087@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2088@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2089@item --warn-section-align
2090Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2091alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2092The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2093is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2094the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2095
8fdd7217
NC
2096@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2097@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2098Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2099
a0c402a5
L
2100@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2101@item --warn-alternate-em
2102Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2103
560e09e9
NC
2104@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2105@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2106If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2107@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2108This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2109
2110@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2111@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2112This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2113it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2114
252b5132
RH
2115@kindex --whole-archive
2116@cindex including an entire archive
2117@item --whole-archive
2118For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2119@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2120in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2121files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2122library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2123library. This option may be used more than once.
2124
7ec229ce 2125Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2126about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2127Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2128list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2129your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2130
2509a395
SL
2131@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2132@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2133Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2134@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2135undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2136@var{symbol}.
2137
2138This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2139wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2140wishes to call the system function, it should call
2141@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2142
2143Here is a trivial example:
2144
2145@smallexample
2146void *
cc2f008e 2147__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2148@{
cc2f008e 2149 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2150 return __real_malloc (c);
2151@}
2152@end smallexample
2153
ff5dcc92 2154If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2155all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2156instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2157call the real @code{malloc} function.
2158
2159You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2160links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2161you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2162file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2163call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2164
6aa29e7b
JJ
2165@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2166@item --eh-frame-hdr
2167Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2168@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2169
e41b3a13
JJ
2170@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2171@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2172Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2173generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2174if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2175
6c1439be
L
2176@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2177@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2178@item --enable-new-dtags
2179@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2180This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2181systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2182@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2183and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2184If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2185created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2186those options are only available for ELF systems.
2187
2d643429 2188@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2189@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2190Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2191close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2192time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2193increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2194value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2195
fdc90cb4
JJ
2196@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2197@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2198Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2199@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2200new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2201the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2202hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2203
0ce398f1
L
2204@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2205@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2206@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2207@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2208@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2209@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2210@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2211@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2212On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2213compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2214compress DWARF debug sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2215and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compress DWARF debug
2216sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2217instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2218compresses DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2219
35835446
JR
2220@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2221@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2222This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2223linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2224for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2225about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2226
4f9c04f7 2227Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 22281021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2229run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2230has been used.
2231
2232The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2233enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2234
c0065db7
RM
2235@kindex --build-id
2236@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2237@item --build-id
2238@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2239Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2240or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2241unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2242@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2243@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2244@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2245the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2246string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2247@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2248is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2249
2250The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2251that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2252unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2253to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2254file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2255string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2256
2257Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2258@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2259@end table
2260
0285c67d
NC
2261@c man end
2262
36f63dca 2263@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2264
0285c67d
NC
2265@c man begin OPTIONS
2266
ff5dcc92 2267The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2268the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2269normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2270use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2271@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2272like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2273symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2274object file).
2275
2276In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2277support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2278PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2279values by either a space or an equals sign.
2280
ff5dcc92 2281@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2282
2283@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2284@item --add-stdcall-alias
2285If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2286as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2287[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2288
2289@kindex --base-file
2290@item --base-file @var{file}
2291Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2292addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2293@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2294[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2295
2296@kindex --dll
2297@item --dll
2298Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2299@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2300file.
bb10df36 2301[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2302
88183869
DK
2303@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2304@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2305@item --enable-long-section-names
2306@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2307The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2308the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2309for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2310fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2311to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2312allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2313disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2314generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2315as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2316with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2317GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2318information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2319option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2320section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2321when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2322image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2323[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2324
252b5132
RH
2325@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2326@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2327@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2328@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2329If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2330do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2331only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2332resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2333undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2334@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2335to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2336warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2337import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2338to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2339feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2340@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2341mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2342[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2343
522f09cd
KT
2344@kindex --leading-underscore
2345@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2346@item --leading-underscore
2347@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2348For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2349in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2350disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2351
252b5132
RH
2352@cindex DLLs, creating
2353@kindex --export-all-symbols
2354@item --export-all-symbols
2355If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2356be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2357otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2358explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2359attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2360option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2361@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2362@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2363exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2364re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2365such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2366@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2367@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2368Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2369not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2370extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2371(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2372These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2373@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2374@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2375@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2376@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2378
2379@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2380@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2381Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2382exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2383[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2384
2927aaca
NC
2385@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2386@item --exclude-all-symbols
2387Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2388[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2389
252b5132
RH
2390@kindex --file-alignment
2391@item --file-alignment
2392Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2393file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2394512.
bb10df36 2395[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2396
2397@cindex heap size
2398@kindex --heap
2399@item --heap @var{reserve}
2400@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2401Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2402to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2403committed.
bb10df36 2404[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2405
2406@cindex image base
2407@kindex --image-base
2408@item --image-base @var{value}
2409Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2410the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2411is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2412your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2413other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2414for dlls.
bb10df36 2415[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2416
2417@kindex --kill-at
2418@item --kill-at
2419If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2420symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2421[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2422
26d2d8a2
BF
2423@kindex --large-address-aware
2424@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2425If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2426header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2427greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2428or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2429section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2430[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2431
f69a2f97
NC
2432@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2433@item --disable-large-address-aware
2434Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2435This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2436driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2437addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2438[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2439
252b5132
RH
2440@kindex --major-image-version
2441@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2442Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2443[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2444
2445@kindex --major-os-version
2446@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2447Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2448[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2449
2450@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2451@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2452Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2453[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2454
2455@kindex --minor-image-version
2456@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2457Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2458[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2459
2460@kindex --minor-os-version
2461@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2462Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2463[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2464
2465@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2466@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2467Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2468[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2469
2470@cindex DEF files, creating
2471@cindex DLLs, creating
2472@kindex --output-def
2473@item --output-def @var{file}
2474The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2475file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2476(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2477library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2478automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2479[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2480
b044cda1
CW
2481@cindex DLLs, creating
2482@kindex --out-implib
2483@item --out-implib @var{file}
2484The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2485import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2486import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2487may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2488makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2489creation step.
bb10df36 2490[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2491
2492@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2493@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2494@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2495Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2496@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2497By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2498for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2499execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2500[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2501
2502@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2503@item --disable-auto-image-base
2504Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2505user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2506default.
bb10df36 2507[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2508
2509@cindex DLLs, linking to
2510@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2511@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2512When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2513search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2514@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2515between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2516uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2517@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2519
2520@kindex --enable-auto-import
2521@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2522Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2523DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2524building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2525'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2526to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2527specification published by Microsoft.
2528
e2a83dd0
NC
2529Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2530data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2531placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2532around a problem with consts that is described here:
2533http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2534
4d8907ac
DS
2535Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2536see this message:
0d888aac 2537
ece2d90e 2538"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2539documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2540
ece2d90e
NC
2541This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2542ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2543allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2544fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2545constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2546multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2547this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2548of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2549the warning, and exit.
2550
2551There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2552data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2553
2fa9fc65
NC
2554One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2555of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2556this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2557
c0065db7
RM
2558A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2559that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2560there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2561a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2562
2563@example
2564extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2565extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2566 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2567@end example
2568
2569or
2570
2571@example
2572extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2573extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2574 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2575@end example
2576
c0065db7 2577For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2578is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2579
2580@example
2581extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2582extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2583 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2584@end example
2585
c406afaf
NC
2586or
2587
2588@example
2589extern long long extern_ll;
2590extern_ll -->
2591 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2592@end example
2593
2fa9fc65 2594A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2595'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2596@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2597requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2598building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2599merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2600between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2601constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2602
2603Original:
2604@example
2605--foo.h
2606extern int arr[];
2607--foo.c
2608#include "foo.h"
2609void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2610 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2611@}
2612@end example
2613
2614Solution 1:
2615@example
2616--foo.h
2617extern int arr[];
2618--foo.c
2619#include "foo.h"
2620void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2621 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2622 volatile int *parr = arr;
2623 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2624@}
2625@end example
2626
2627Solution 2:
2628@example
2629--foo.h
2630/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2631#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2632 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2633#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2634#else
2635#define FOO_IMPORT
2636#endif
2637extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2638--foo.c
2639#include "foo.h"
2640void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2641 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2642@}
2643@end example
2644
c0065db7 2645A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2646library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2647for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2648functions).
bb10df36 2649[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2650
2651@kindex --disable-auto-import
2652@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2653Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2654@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2655[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2656
2fa9fc65
NC
2657@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2658@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2659If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2660that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2661a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2662environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2663[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2664
2665@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2666@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2667Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2668DLLs.
bb10df36 2669[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2670
b044cda1
CW
2671@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2672@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2673Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2674[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2675
252b5132
RH
2676@kindex --section-alignment
2677@item --section-alignment
2678Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2679addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2680[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2681
2682@cindex stack size
2683@kindex --stack
2684@item --stack @var{reserve}
2685@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2686Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2687to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2688committed.
bb10df36 2689[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2690
2691@kindex --subsystem
2692@item --subsystem @var{which}
2693@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2694@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2695Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2696legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2697@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2698the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2699@var{which}.
bb10df36 2700[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2701
2f563b51
DK
2702The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2703of the PE file header:
2704[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2705
2d5c3743
NC
2706@kindex --high-entropy-va
2707@item --high-entropy-va
2708Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2709(ASLR).
2710
2f563b51
DK
2711@kindex --dynamicbase
2712@item --dynamicbase
2713The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2714randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2715Vista for i386 PE targets.
2716
2717@kindex --forceinteg
2718@item --forceinteg
2719Code integrity checks are enforced.
2720
2721@kindex --nxcompat
2722@item --nxcompat
2723The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2724This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2725
2726@kindex --no-isolation
2727@item --no-isolation
2728Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2729
2730@kindex --no-seh
2731@item --no-seh
2732The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2733this image.
2734
2735@kindex --no-bind
2736@item --no-bind
2737Do not bind this image.
2738
2739@kindex --wdmdriver
2740@item --wdmdriver
2741The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2742
2f563b51
DK
2743@kindex --tsaware
2744@item --tsaware
2745The image is Terminal Server aware.
2746
0cb112f7
CF
2747@kindex --insert-timestamp
2748@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2749@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2750Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2751as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2752other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2753will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2754same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2755can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2756that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2757identically.
252b5132
RH
2758@end table
2759
0285c67d
NC
2760@c man end
2761
ac145307
BS
2762@ifset C6X
2763@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2764
2765@c man begin OPTIONS
2766
2767The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2768libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2769all executables use an index of 0.
2770
2771@table @gcctabopt
2772
2773@kindex --dsbt-size
2774@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2775This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2776or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2777entries.
2778
2779@kindex --dsbt-index
2780@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2781This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2782to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2783executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2784@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2785
fbd9ad90
PB
2786@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2787The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2788exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2789
ac145307
BS
2790@end table
2791
2792@c man end
2793@end ifset
2794
93fd0973
SC
2795@ifset M68HC11
2796@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2797
2798@c man begin OPTIONS
2799
2800The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2801memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2802
2803@table @gcctabopt
2804
2805@kindex --no-trampoline
2806@item --no-trampoline
2807This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2808is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2809instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2810
2811@kindex --bank-window
2812@item --bank-window @var{name}
2813This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2814the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2815The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2816paging and addresses within the memory window.
2817
2818@end table
2819
2820@c man end
2821@end ifset
2822
7fb9f789
NC
2823@ifset M68K
2824@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2825
2826@c man begin OPTIONS
2827
2828The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2829when linking for 68K targets.
2830
2831@table @gcctabopt
2832
2833@kindex --got
2834@item --got=@var{type}
2835This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2836@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2837@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2838Info entry for @file{ld}.
2839
2840@end table
2841
2842@c man end
2843@end ifset
2844
833794fc
MR
2845@ifset MIPS
2846@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2847
2848@c man begin OPTIONS
2849
2850The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2851generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2852
2853@table @gcctabopt
2854
2855@kindex --insn32
2856@item --insn32
2857@kindex --no-insn32
2858@itemx --no-insn32
2859These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2860generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2861or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
286232-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2863used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2864possible.
2865
2866@end table
2867
2868@c man end
2869@end ifset
2870
252b5132
RH
2871@ifset UsesEnvVars
2872@node Environment
2873@section Environment Variables
2874
0285c67d
NC
2875@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2876
560e09e9 2877You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2878@ifclear SingleFormat
2879@code{GNUTARGET},
2880@end ifclear
2881@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2882
36f63dca 2883@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2884@kindex GNUTARGET
2885@cindex default input format
2886@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2887use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2888of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2889@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2890of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2891attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2892this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2893there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2894object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2895BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2896in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2897@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2898
2899@kindex LDEMULATION
2900@cindex default emulation
2901@cindex emulation, default
2902@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2903@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2904behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2905available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2906the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2907variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2908linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2909
2910@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2911@cindex demangling, default
2912Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2913@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2914default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2915a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2916may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2917options.
2918
0285c67d
NC
2919@c man end
2920@end ifset
2921
252b5132
RH
2922@node Scripts
2923@chapter Linker Scripts
2924
2925@cindex scripts
2926@cindex linker scripts
2927@cindex command files
2928Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2929written in the linker command language.
2930
2931The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2932the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2933the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2934more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2935direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2936described below.
2937
2938The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2939yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2940linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2941to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2942such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2943
2944You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2945line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2946default linker script.
2947
2948You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2949to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2950Linker Scripts}.
2951
2952@menu
2953* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2954* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2955* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2956* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2957* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2958* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2959* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2960* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2961* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2962* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2963* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2964@end menu
2965
2966@node Basic Script Concepts
2967@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2968@cindex linker script concepts
2969We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2970describe the linker script language.
2971
2972The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2973file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2974@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2975The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2976purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2977among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2978section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2979in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2980
2981Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2982also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2983contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2984the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2985A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2986area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2987loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2988which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2989of debugging information.
2990
2991Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2992first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2993the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2994@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2995section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2996same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2997is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2998(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2999based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3000RAM address would be the VMA.
3001
3002You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3003program with the @samp{-h} option.
3004
3005Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3006@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3007has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3008information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3009will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3010static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3011referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3012
3013You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3014program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3015option.
3016
3017@node Script Format
3018@section Linker Script Format
3019@cindex linker script format
3020Linker scripts are text files.
3021
3022You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3023either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3024symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3025generally ignored.
3026
3027Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3028If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3029otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3030double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3031file name.
3032
3033You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3034@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3035to whitespace.
3036
3037@node Simple Example
3038@section Simple Linker Script Example
3039@cindex linker script example
3040@cindex example of linker script
3041Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3042
3043The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3044@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3045memory layout of the output file.
3046
3047The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3048describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3049code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3050@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3051Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3052your input files.
3053
3054For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30550x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3056linker script which will do that:
3057@smallexample
3058SECTIONS
3059@{
3060 . = 0x10000;
3061 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3062 . = 0x8000000;
3063 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3064 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3065@}
3066@end smallexample
3067
3068You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3069followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3070descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3071
252b5132
RH
3072The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3073sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3074counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3075other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3076current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3077incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3078@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3079
3080The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3081required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3082after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3083which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3084wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3085means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3086
3087Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3088@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3089@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3090
3091The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3092the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3093at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3094output section, the value of the location counter will be
3095@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3096effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3097immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3098
3099The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3100alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3101example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3102sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3103may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3104sections.
3105
3106That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3107
3108@node Simple Commands
3109@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3110@cindex linker script simple commands
3111In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3112
3113@menu
3114* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3115* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3116@ifclear SingleFormat
3117* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3118@end ifclear
3119
4a93e180 3120* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3121* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3122@end menu
3123
3124@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3125@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3126@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3127@cindex start of execution
3128@cindex first instruction
3129@cindex entry point
3130The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3131point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3132entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3133@smallexample
3134ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3135@end smallexample
3136
3137There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3138entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3139stopping when one of them succeeds:
3140@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3141@item
252b5132 3142the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3143@item
252b5132 3144the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3145@item
3ab904c4
NC
3146the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3147targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3148check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3149@item
252b5132 3150the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3151@item
252b5132
RH
3152The address @code{0}.
3153@end itemize
3154
3155@node File Commands
36f63dca 3156@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3157@cindex linker script file commands
3158Several linker script commands deal with files.
3159
3160@table @code
3161@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3162@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3163@cindex including a linker script
3164Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3165be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3166with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
316710 levels deep.
3168
4006703d
NS
3169You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3170@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3171
252b5132
RH
3172@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3173@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3174@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3175@cindex input files in linker scripts
3176@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3177@cindex linker script input object files
3178The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3179in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3180
3181For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3182a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3183then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3184
3185In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3186script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3187
e3f2db7f
AO
3188In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3189with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3190located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3191for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3192open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3193linker will search through the archive library search path.
3194The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3195as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3196description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3197
ff5dcc92 3198If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3199name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3200@samp{-l}.
3201
3202When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3203files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3204script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3205
3206@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3207@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3208@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3209@cindex grouping input files
3210The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3211files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3212new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3213in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3214
b717d30e
JJ
3215@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3216@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3217@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3218This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3219commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3220as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3221with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3222when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3223@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3224and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3225setting afterwards.
3226
252b5132
RH
3227@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3228@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3229@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3230The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3231@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3232@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3233Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3234precedence.
3235
3236You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3237output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3238
3239@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3240@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3241@cindex library search path in linker script
3242@cindex archive search path in linker script
3243@cindex search path in linker script
3244The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3245@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3246@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3247on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3248are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3249the command line option are searched first.
3250
3251@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3252@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3253@cindex first input file
3254The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3255that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3256though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3257when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3258first file.
3259@end table
3260
3261@ifclear SingleFormat
3262@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3263@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3264A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3265
3266@table @code
3267@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3268@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3269@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3270@cindex output file format in linker script
3271The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3272output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3273exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3274(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3275line option takes precedence.
3276
3277You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3278formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3279This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3280desired endianness.
3281
3282If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3283will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3284output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3285used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3286
3287For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3288command:
3289@smallexample
3290OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3291@end smallexample
3292This says that the default format for the output file is
3293@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3294option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3295format.
3296
3297@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3298@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3299@cindex input file format in linker script
3300The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3301files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3302This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3303(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3304is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3305command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3306@end table
3307@end ifclear
3308
4a93e180
NC
3309@node REGION_ALIAS
3310@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3311@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3312@cindex region alias
3313@cindex region names
3314
3315Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3316@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3317
3318@smallexample
3319REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3320@end smallexample
3321
3322The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3323memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3324to memory regions. An example follows.
3325
3326Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3327memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3328that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3329non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3330access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3331read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3332sections:
3333
3334@itemize @bullet
3335@item
3336@code{.text} program code;
3337@item
3338@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3339@item
3340@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3341@item
3342@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3343@end itemize
3344
3345The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3346part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3347output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3348systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3349@code{C}:
3350@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3351@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3352@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3353@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3354@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3355@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3356@end multitable
3357The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3358loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3359the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3360the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3361
3362The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3363includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3364memory layout:
3365@smallexample
3366INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3367
3368SECTIONS
3369 @{
3370 .text :
3371 @{
3372 *(.text)
3373 @} > REGION_TEXT
3374 .rodata :
3375 @{
3376 *(.rodata)
3377 rodata_end = .;
3378 @} > REGION_RODATA
3379 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3380 @{
3381 data_start = .;
3382 *(.data)
3383 @} > REGION_DATA
3384 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3385 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3386 .bss :
3387 @{
3388 *(.bss)
3389 @} > REGION_BSS
3390 @}
3391@end smallexample
3392
3393Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3394regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3395variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3396@table @code
3397@item A
3398Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3399@smallexample
3400MEMORY
3401 @{
3402 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3403 @}
3404
3405REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3406REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3407REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3408REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3409@end smallexample
3410@item B
3411Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3412into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3413@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3414@smallexample
3415MEMORY
3416 @{
3417 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3418 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3419 @}
3420
3421REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3422REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3423REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3424REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3425@end smallexample
3426@item C
3427Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3428@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3429initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3430system start into the @code{RAM}.
3431@smallexample
3432MEMORY
3433 @{
3434 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3435 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3436 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3437 @}
3438
3439REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3440REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3441REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3442REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3443@end smallexample
3444@end table
3445
3446It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3447@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3448necessary:
3449@smallexample
3450#include <string.h>
3451
3452extern char data_start [];
3453extern char data_size [];
3454extern char data_load_start [];
3455
3456void copy_data(void)
3457@{
3458 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3459 @{
3460 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3461 @}
3462@}
3463@end smallexample
3464
252b5132 3465@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3466@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3467There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3468
3469@table @code
3470@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3471@kindex ASSERT
3472@cindex assertion in linker script
3473Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3474with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3475
fd1c4238
NC
3476Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3477take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3478inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3479for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3480symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3481
3482@smallexample
3483 .stack :
3484 @{
3485 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3486 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3487 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3488 @}
3489@end smallexample
3490
3491will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3492PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3493can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3494
3495@smallexample
3496 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3497 .stack :
3498 @{
3499 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3500 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3501 @}
3502@end smallexample
3503
3504will work.
3505
252b5132
RH
3506@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3507@kindex EXTERN
3508@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3509Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3510symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3511modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3512each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3513command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3514
3515@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3516@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3517@cindex common allocation in linker script
3518This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3519to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3520output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3521
4818e05f
AM
3522@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3523@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3524@cindex common allocation in linker script
3525This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3526command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3527to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3528
53d25da6
AM
3529@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3530@kindex INSERT
3531@cindex insert user script into default script
3532This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3533augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3534inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3535@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3536default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3537sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3538linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3539insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3540linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3541default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3542of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3543to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3544is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3545
3546@smallexample
3547SECTIONS
3548@{
3549 OVERLAY :
3550 @{
3551 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3552 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3553 @}
3554@}
3555INSERT AFTER .text;
3556@end smallexample
3557
252b5132
RH
3558@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3559@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3560@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3561This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3562references among certain output sections.
3563
3564In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3565using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3566will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3567errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3568a function defined in the other section.
3569
3570The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3571@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3572an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3573@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3574names.
3575
3576@ifclear SingleFormat
3577@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3578@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3579@cindex machine architecture
3580@cindex architecture
3581Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3582of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3583architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3584the @samp{-f} option.
3585@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3586
3587@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3588@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3589This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3590@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3591in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3592@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3593@end table
3594
3595@node Assignments
3596@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3597@cindex assignment in scripts
3598@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3599@cindex variables, defining
3600You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3601the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3602
3603@menu
3604* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3605* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3606* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3607* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3608* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3609@end menu
3610
3611@node Simple Assignments
3612@subsection Simple Assignments
3613
3614You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3615
3616@table @code
3617@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3618@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3619@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3620@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3621@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3622@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3623@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3624@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3625@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3626@end table
3627
3628The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3629@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3630defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3631
3632The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3633may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3634
3635The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3636
3637Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3638
3639You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3640statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3641section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3642
3643The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3644expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3645
3646Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3647assignments may be used:
3648
3649@smallexample
3650floating_point = 0;
3651SECTIONS
3652@{
3653 .text :
3654 @{
3655 *(.text)
3656 _etext = .;
3657 @}
156e34dd 3658 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3659 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3660@}
3661@end smallexample
3662@noindent
3663In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3664zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3665the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3666defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3667upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3668
eb8476a6
MR
3669@node HIDDEN
3670@subsection HIDDEN
3671@cindex HIDDEN
3672For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3673exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3674
3675Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3676@code{HIDDEN}:
3677
3678@smallexample
3679HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3680SECTIONS
3681@{
3682 .text :
3683 @{
3684 *(.text)
3685 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3686 @}
3687 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3688 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3689@}
3690@end smallexample
3691@noindent
3692In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3693
252b5132
RH
3694@node PROVIDE
3695@subsection PROVIDE
3696@cindex PROVIDE
3697In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3698only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3699the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3700@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3701@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3702@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3703@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3704@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3705
3706Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3707@smallexample
3708SECTIONS
3709@{
3710 .text :
3711 @{
3712 *(.text)
3713 _etext = .;
3714 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3715 @}
3716@}
3717@end smallexample
3718
3719In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3720underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3721the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3722underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3723If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3724linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3725
7af8e998
L
3726@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3727@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3728@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3729Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3730hidden and won't be exported.
3731
73ae6183
NC
3732@node Source Code Reference
3733@subsection Source Code Reference
3734
3735Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3736intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3737a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3738symbol that does not have a value.
3739
3740Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3741transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3742stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3743prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3744mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3745of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3746variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3747linker script variable might be referred to as:
3748
3749@smallexample
3750 extern int foo;
3751@end smallexample
3752
3753But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3754
3755@smallexample
3756 _foo = 1000;
3757@end smallexample
3758
3759In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3760transformation has taken place.
3761
3762When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3763things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3764in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3765second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3766table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3767contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3768value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3769
3770@smallexample
3771 int foo = 1000;
3772@end smallexample
3773
10bf6894 3774creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3775holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3776number 1000 is initially stored.
3777
3778When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3779first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3780memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3781So:
3782
3783@smallexample
3784 foo = 1;
3785@end smallexample
3786
3787looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3788associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3789address. Whereas:
3790
3791@smallexample
3792 int * a = & foo;
3793@end smallexample
3794
10bf6894 3795looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3796and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3797the variable @samp{a}.
3798
3799Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3800the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3801an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3802
3803@smallexample
3804 foo = 1000;
3805@end smallexample
3806
3807creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3808the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3809address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3810linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3811access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3812
3813Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3814you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3815use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3816section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3817linker script contains these declarations:
3818
3819@smallexample
3820@group
3821 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3822 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3823 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3824@end group
3825@end smallexample
3826
3827Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3828
3829@smallexample
3830@group
3831 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3832
73ae6183
NC
3833 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3834@end group
3835@end smallexample
3836
3837Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3838
252b5132 3839@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3840@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3841@kindex SECTIONS
3842The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3843into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3844
3845The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3846@smallexample
3847SECTIONS
3848@{
3849 @var{sections-command}
3850 @var{sections-command}
3851 @dots{}
3852@}
3853@end smallexample
3854
3855Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3856
3857@itemize @bullet
3858@item
3859an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3860@item
3861a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3862@item
3863an output section description
3864@item
3865an overlay description
3866@end itemize
3867
3868The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3869@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3870those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3871understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3872the layout of the output file.
3873
3874Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3875below.
3876
3877If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3878linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3879section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3880input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3881example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3882in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3883
3884@menu
3885* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3886* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3887* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3888* Input Section:: Input section description
3889* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3890* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3891* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3892* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3893* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3894@end menu
3895
3896@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3897@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3898The full description of an output section looks like this:
3899@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3900@group
7e7d5768 3901@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3902 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3903 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3904 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3905 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3906 @{
3907 @var{output-section-command}
3908 @var{output-section-command}
3909 @dots{}
abc9061b 3910 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3911@end group
3912@end smallexample
3913
3914Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3915
3916The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3917name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3918The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3919the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3920The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3921
3922Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3923
3924@itemize @bullet
3925@item
3926a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3927@item
3928an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3929@item
3930data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3931@item
3932a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3933@end itemize
3934
3935@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3936@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3937@cindex name, section
3938@cindex section name
3939The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3940meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3941support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3942must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3943example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3944output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3945names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3946quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3947characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3948commas must be quoted.
3949
3950The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3951Discarding}.
3952
3953@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3954@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3955@cindex address, section
3956@cindex section address
3957The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3958address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3959is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3960
3961If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3962section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3963to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3964alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3965contained within the output section.
3966
3967The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3968
3969@itemize @bullet
3970@item
3971If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3972is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3973in that region.
3974
3975@item
3976If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3977regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3978section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3979be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3980
3981@item
3982If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3983the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3984counter.
3985@end itemize
3986
3987@noindent
3988For example:
3989
252b5132
RH
3990@smallexample
3991.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3992@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3993
252b5132
RH
3994@noindent
3995and
ea5cae92 3996
252b5132
RH
3997@smallexample
3998.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3999@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4000
252b5132
RH
4001@noindent
4002are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4003@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4004counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4005counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4006input sections.
252b5132
RH
4007
4008The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4009For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4010so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4011do something like this:
4012@smallexample
4013.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4014@end smallexample
4015@noindent
4016This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4017aligned upward to the specified value.
4018
4019Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4020location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4021sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4022
4023@node Input Section
36f63dca 4024@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4025@cindex input sections
4026@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4027The most common output section command is an input section description.
4028
4029The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4030You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4031in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4032map the input files into your memory layout.
4033
4034@menu
4035* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4036* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4037* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4038* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4039* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4040@end menu
4041
4042@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4043@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4044@cindex input section basics
4045An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4046by a list of section names in parentheses.
4047
4048The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4049describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4050
4051The most common input section description is to include all input
4052sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4053include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4054@smallexample
4055*(.text)
4056@end smallexample
4057@noindent
18625d54
CM
4058Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4059of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4060match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4061example:
252b5132 4062@smallexample
b4346c09 4063*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4064@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4065will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4066@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4067
4068There are two ways to include more than one section:
4069@smallexample
4070*(.text .rdata)
4071*(.text) *(.rdata)
4072@end smallexample
4073@noindent
4074The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4075@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4076first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4077they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4078@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4079@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4080
4081You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4082You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4083needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4084@smallexample
4085data.o(.data)
4086@end smallexample
4087
ae17ab41
CM
4088To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4089of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4090
4091Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4092
4093@smallexample
4094@group
4095SECTIONS @{
4096 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4097 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4098@}
4099@end group
4100@end smallexample
4101
4102In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4103input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4104@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4105@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4106whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4107
967928e9
AM
4108You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4109matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4110with no whitespace around the colon.
4111
4112@table @samp
4113@item archive:file
4114matches file within archive
4115@item archive:
4116matches the whole archive
4117@item :file
4118matches file but not one in an archive
4119@end table
4120
4121Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4122wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4123single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4124@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4125within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4126also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4127other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4128from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4129command.
4130
252b5132
RH
4131If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4132the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4133commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4134@smallexample
4135data.o
4136@end smallexample
4137
967928e9
AM
4138When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4139and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4140characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4141name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4142did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4143though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4144@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4145the archive search path.
4146
4147@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4148@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4149@cindex input section wildcards
4150@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4151@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4152@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4153In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4154name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4155
4156The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4157pattern for the file name.
4158
4159The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4160
4161@table @samp
4162@item *
4163matches any number of characters
4164@item ?
4165matches any single character
4166@item [@var{chars}]
4167matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4168character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4169@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4170@item \
4171quotes the following character
4172@end table
4173
4174When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4175will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4176Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4177exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4178@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4179a @samp{/} character.
4180
4181File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4182specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4183does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4184
4185If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4186appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4187will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4188sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4189@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4190@smallexample
4191.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4192.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4193@end smallexample
4194
bcaa7b3e 4195@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4196Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4197in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4198this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4199pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4200@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4201into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4202
bcaa7b3e
L
4203@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4204@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4205difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4206descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4207Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4208reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4209
02ecc8e9
L
4210@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4211@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4212difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4213ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4214encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4215
bcaa7b3e
L
4216@cindex SORT
4217@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4218
4219When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4220can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4221
4222@enumerate
4223@item
4224@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4225It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4226sections have the same name.
4227@item
4228@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4229It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4230sections have the same alignment.
4231@item
c0065db7 4232@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4233treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4234@item
4235@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4236is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4237@item
4238All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4239@end enumerate
4240
4241When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4242section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4243takes precedence over the command line option.
4244
4245If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4246command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4247treated as nested sorting command.
4248
4249@enumerate
4250@item
4251@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4252@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4253@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4254@item
4255@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4256@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4257@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4258@end enumerate
4259
4260If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4261command line option will be ignored.
4262
eda680f8
L
4263@cindex SORT_NONE
4264@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4265section sorting option.
4266
252b5132
RH
4267If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4268@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4269precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4270
4271This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4272files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4273sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4274The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4275with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4276linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4277@smallexample
4278@group
4279SECTIONS @{
4280 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4281 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4282 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4283 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4284@}
4285@end group
4286@end smallexample
4287
4288@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4289@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4290@cindex common symbol placement
4291@cindex uninitialized data placement
4292A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4293file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4294linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4295named @samp{COMMON}.
4296
4297You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4298other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4299particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4300input files are placed in another section.
4301
4302In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4303@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4304@smallexample
4305.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4306@end smallexample
4307
4308@cindex scommon section
4309@cindex small common symbols
4310Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4311example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4312symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4313different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4314the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4315symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4316to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4317locations.
4318
4319@cindex [COMMON]
4320You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4321notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4322@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4323
4324@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4325@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4326@cindex KEEP
4327@cindex garbage collection
4328When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4329it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4330This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4331with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4332@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4333
4334@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4335@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4336The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4337to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4338start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4339@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4340follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4341@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4342@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4343All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4344files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4345
4346@smallexample
4347@group
4348SECTIONS @{
4349 outputa 0x10000 :
4350 @{
4351 all.o
4352 foo.o (.input1)
4353 @}
36f63dca
NC
4354@end group
4355@group
252b5132
RH
4356 outputb :
4357 @{
4358 foo.o (.input2)
4359 foo1.o (.input1)
4360 @}
36f63dca
NC
4361@end group
4362@group
252b5132
RH
4363 outputc :
4364 @{
4365 *(.input1)
4366 *(.input2)
4367 @}
4368@}
4369@end group
a1ab1d2a 4370@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4371
4372@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4373@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4374@cindex data
4375@cindex section data
4376@cindex output section data
4377@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4378@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4379@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4380@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4381@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4382You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4383@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4384an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4385parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4386value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4387counter.
4388
4389The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4390store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4391bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4392stored.
4393
4394For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4395of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4396@smallexample
4397BYTE(1)
4398LONG(addr)
4399@end smallexample
4400
4401When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4402same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4403target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4404@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4405@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4406
4407If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4408which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4409When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4410true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4411endianness of the first input object file.
4412
36f63dca 4413Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4414between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4415@smallexample
4416SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4417@end smallexample
4418whereas this will work:
4419@smallexample
4420SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4421@end smallexample
4422
252b5132
RH
4423@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4424@cindex holes, filling
4425@cindex unspecified memory
4426You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4427current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4428otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4429gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4430with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4431necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4432point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4433than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4434different parts of an output section.
4435
4436This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4437value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4438@smallexample
563e308f 4439FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4440@end smallexample
4441
4442The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4443section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4444part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4445entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4446precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4447expression.
252b5132
RH
4448
4449@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4450@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4451There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4452commands.
4453
4454@table @code
4455@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4456@cindex input filename symbols
4457@cindex filename symbols
4458@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4459The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4460The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4461file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4462the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4463
4464This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4465normally used for any other object file format.
4466
4467@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4468@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4469@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4470@item CONSTRUCTORS
4471When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4472unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4473destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4474arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4475automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4476For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4477linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4478@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4479ignored for other object file formats.
4480
4481The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4482constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4483Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4484the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4485first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4486of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4487compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4488formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4489@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4490the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4491destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4492@code{exit}.
4493
4494For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4495arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4496addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4497and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4498linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4499runtime code expects to see.
4500
4501@smallexample
4502 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4503 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4504 *(.ctors)
4505 LONG(0)
4506 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4507 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4508 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4509 *(.dtors)
4510 LONG(0)
4511 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4512@end smallexample
4513
4514If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4515which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4516are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4517are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4518command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4519@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4520@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4521@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4522
4523Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4524and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4525need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4526scripts.
4527
4528@end table
4529
4530@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4531@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4532@cindex discarding sections
4533@cindex sections, discarding
4534@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4535The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4536This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4537may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4538@smallexample
49c13adb 4539.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4540@end smallexample
4541@noindent
4542will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4543@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4544sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4545space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4546too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4547space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4548@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4549@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4550This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4551
a0976ea4 4552The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4553on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4554symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4555the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4556section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4557
4558@cindex /DISCARD/
4559The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4560input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4561section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4562
4563@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4564@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4565@cindex output section attributes
4566We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4567like this:
0c71d759 4568
252b5132 4569@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4570@group
7e7d5768 4571@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4572 [AT(@var{lma})]
4573 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4574 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4575 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4576 @{
4577 @var{output-section-command}
4578 @var{output-section-command}
4579 @dots{}
562d3460 4580 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4581@end group
4582@end smallexample
0c71d759 4583
252b5132
RH
4584We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4585@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4586remaining section attributes.
4587
a1ab1d2a 4588@menu
252b5132
RH
4589* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4590* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4591* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4592* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4593* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4594* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4595* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4596* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4597@end menu
4598
4599@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4600@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4601Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4602parentheses. The following types are defined:
4603
4604@table @code
4605@item NOLOAD
4606The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4607loaded into memory when the program is run.
4608@item DSECT
4609@itemx COPY
4610@itemx INFO
4611@itemx OVERLAY
4612These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4613rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4614marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4615section when the program is run.
4616@end table
4617
4618@kindex NOLOAD
4619@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4620@cindex loading, preventing
4621The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4622the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4623the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4624@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4625need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4626@smallexample
4627@group
4628SECTIONS @{
4629 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4630 @dots{}
4631@}
4632@end group
4633@end smallexample
4634
4635@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4636@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4637@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4638@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4639@cindex load address
4640@cindex section load address
4641Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4642@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4643@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4644specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4645address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4646
ea5cae92
NC
4647The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4648specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4649takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4650load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4651region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4652
4653If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4654section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4655load address:
4656
4657@itemize @bullet
4658@item
4659If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4660the LMA address as well.
4661
4662@item
4663If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4664
4665@item
4666Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4667with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4668section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4669VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4670the last section in the located region.
4671
4672@item
4673If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4674that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4675
4676@item
4677If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4678section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4679@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4680
4681@cindex ROM initialized data
4682@cindex initialized data in ROM
4683This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4684example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4685called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4686@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4687even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4688uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4689defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4690counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4691
4692@smallexample
4693@group
4694SECTIONS
4695 @{
4696 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4697 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4698 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4699 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4700 .bss 0x3000 :
4701 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4702@}
4703@end group
4704@end smallexample
4705
4706The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4707this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4708the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4709how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4710script.
4711
4712@smallexample
4713@group
4714extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4715char *src = &_etext;
4716char *dst = &_data;
4717
ea5cae92
NC
4718/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4719while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4720 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4721
ea5cae92 4722/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4723for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4724 *dst = 0;
4725@end group
4726@end smallexample
4727
bbf115d3
L
4728@node Forced Output Alignment
4729@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4730@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4731@cindex forcing output section alignment
4732@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4733You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4734alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4735intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4736
7e7d5768
AM
4737@node Forced Input Alignment
4738@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4739@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4740@cindex forcing input section alignment
4741@cindex input section alignment
4742You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4743SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4744sections, whether larger or smaller.
4745
0c71d759
NC
4746@node Output Section Constraint
4747@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4748@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4749@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4750@cindex constraints on output sections
4751You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4752of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4753read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4754@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4755
252b5132 4756@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4757@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4758@kindex >@var{region}
4759@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4760@cindex memory regions and sections
4761You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4762using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4763
4764Here is a simple example:
4765@smallexample
4766@group
4767MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4768SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4769@end group
4770@end smallexample
4771
4772@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4773@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4774@kindex :@var{phdr}
4775@cindex section, assigning to program header
4776@cindex program headers and sections
4777You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4778using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4779one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4780assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4781@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4782linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4783
4784Here is a simple example:
4785@smallexample
4786@group
4787PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4788SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4789@end group
4790@end smallexample
4791
4792@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4793@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4794@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4795@cindex section fill pattern
4796@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4797You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4798@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4799(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4800within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4801alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4802necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4803of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4804an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4805fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4806other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4807pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4808expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4809
4810You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4811output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4812
4813Here is a simple example:
4814@smallexample
4815@group
563e308f 4816SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4817@end group
4818@end smallexample
4819
4820@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4821@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4822@kindex OVERLAY
4823@cindex overlays
4824An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4825are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4826the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4827copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4828required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4829can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4830than another.
4831
4832Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4833@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4834output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4835command is as follows:
4836@smallexample
4837@group
4838OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4839 @{
4840 @var{secname1}
4841 @{
4842 @var{output-section-command}
4843 @var{output-section-command}
4844 @dots{}
4845 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4846 @var{secname2}
4847 @{
4848 @var{output-section-command}
4849 @var{output-section-command}
4850 @dots{}
4851 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4852 @dots{}
abc9061b 4853 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4854@end group
4855@end smallexample
4856
4857Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4858section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4859section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4860those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4861except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4862sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4863
abc9061b
CC
4864The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4865the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4866
252b5132
RH
4867The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4868addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4869memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4870whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4871and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4872and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4873
56dd11f0
NC
4874If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4875references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4876the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4877sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4878@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4879
4880For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4881provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4882defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4883@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4884the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4885within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4886symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4887
4888At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4889the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4890
4891Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4892@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4893@smallexample
4894@group
4895 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4896 @{
4897 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4898 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4899 @}
4900@end group
4901@end smallexample
4902@noindent
4903This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4904address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4905@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4906following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4907@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4908@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4909
4910C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4911like the following.
4912
4913@smallexample
4914@group
4915 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4916 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4917 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4918@end group
4919@end smallexample
4920
4921Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4922everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4923example could have been written identically as follows.
4924
4925@smallexample
4926@group
4927 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4928 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4929 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4930 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4931 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4932 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4933 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4934@end group
4935@end smallexample
4936
4937@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4938@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4939@kindex MEMORY
4940@cindex memory regions
4941@cindex regions of memory
4942@cindex allocating memory
4943@cindex discontinuous memory
4944The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4945memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4946
4947The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4948memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4949may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4950can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4951set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4952regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4953around to fit into the available regions.
4954
4955A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4956command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4957you wish. The syntax is:
4958@smallexample
4959@group
a1ab1d2a 4960MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4961 @{
4962 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4963 @dots{}
4964 @}
4965@end group
4966@end smallexample
4967
4968The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4969region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4970Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4971with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4972must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4973add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4974command.
252b5132
RH
4975
4976@cindex memory region attributes
4977The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4978whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4979not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4980@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4981section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4982the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4983them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4984
4985The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4986@table @samp
4987@item R
4988Read-only section
4989@item W
4990Read/write section
4991@item X
4992Executable section
4993@item A
4994Allocatable section
4995@item I
4996Initialized section
4997@item L
4998Same as @samp{I}
4999@item !
c09e9a8c 5000Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5001@end table
5002
5003If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5004@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5005attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5006in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5007attributes.
5008
5009@kindex ORIGIN =
5010@kindex o =
5011@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5012The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5013the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5014cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5015abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5016@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5017
5018@kindex LENGTH =
5019@kindex len =
5020@kindex l =
5021The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5022region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5023be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5024@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5025
5026In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5027available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5028and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5029linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5030is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5031or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5032explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5033region.
5034
5035@smallexample
5036@group
a1ab1d2a 5037MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5038 @{
5039 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5040 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5041 @}
5042@end group
5043@end smallexample
5044
5045Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5046specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5047@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5048a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5049output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5050was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5051the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5052output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5053region, the linker will issue an error message.
5054
3ec57632 5055It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5056expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5057@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5058
5059@smallexample
5060@group
c0065db7 5061 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5062@end group
5063@end smallexample
5064
252b5132
RH
5065@node PHDRS
5066@section PHDRS Command
5067@kindex PHDRS
5068@cindex program headers
5069@cindex ELF program headers
5070@cindex program segments
5071@cindex segments, ELF
5072The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5073@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5074loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5075program with the @samp{-p} option.
5076
5077When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5078reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5079program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5080This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5081interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5082
5083The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5084in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5085precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5086the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5087not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5088
5089The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5090generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5091ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5092
5093This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5094@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5095
5096@smallexample
5097@group
5098PHDRS
5099@{
5100 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5101 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5102@}
5103@end group
5104@end smallexample
5105
5106The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5107of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5108header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5109with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5110must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5111is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5112
5113Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5114system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5115specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5116sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5117attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5118Section Phdr}.
5119
5120It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5121merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5122repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5123contain the section.
5124
5125If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5126then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5127not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5128convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5129placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5130default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5131segment at all.
5132
5133@kindex FILEHDR
5134@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5135You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5136the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5137The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5138file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5139include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5140segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5141these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5142
5143The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5144value of the keyword.
5145
5146@table @asis
5147@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5148Indicates an unused program header.
5149
5150@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5151Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5152the file.
5153
5154@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5155Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5156
5157@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5158Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5159found.
5160
5161@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5162Indicates a segment holding note information.
5163
5164@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5165A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5166ABI.
5167
5168@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5169Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5170
5171@item @var{expression}
5172An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5173be used for types not defined above.
5174@end table
5175
5176You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5177in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5178@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5179Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5180output section attribute.
5181
5182The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5183which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5184explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5185an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5186header.
5187
5188Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5189headers used on a native ELF system.
5190
5191@example
5192@group
5193PHDRS
5194@{
5195 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5196 interp PT_INTERP ;
5197 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5198 data PT_LOAD ;
5199 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5200@}
5201
5202SECTIONS
5203@{
5204 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5205 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5206 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5207 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5208 @dots{}
5209 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5210 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5211 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5212 @dots{}
5213@}
5214@end group
5215@end example
5216
5217@node VERSION
5218@section VERSION Command
5219@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5220@cindex symbol versions
5221@cindex version script
5222@cindex versions of symbols
5223The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5224only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5225symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5226a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5227shared library.
5228
5229You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5230you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5231also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5232
5233The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5234@smallexample
5235VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5236@end smallexample
5237
5238The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5239Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5240version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5241version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5242version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5243scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5244library.
5245
5246The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5247examples.
5248
5249@smallexample
5250VERS_1.1 @{
5251 global:
5252 foo1;
5253 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5254 old*;
5255 original*;
5256 new*;
252b5132
RH
5257@};
5258
5259VERS_1.2 @{
5260 foo2;
5261@} VERS_1.1;
5262
5263VERS_2.0 @{
5264 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5265 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5266 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5267 "f(int, double)";
5268 @};
252b5132
RH
5269@} VERS_1.2;
5270@end smallexample
5271
5272This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5273version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5274The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5275a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5276of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5277symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5278is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5279in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5280However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5281name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5282
5283Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5284depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5285to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5286
5287Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5288depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5289and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5290
5291When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5292specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5293unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5294unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5295somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5296wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5297wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5298set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5299ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5300
5301The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5302they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5303could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5304However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5305
0f6bf451 5306Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5307in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5308symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5309won't.
5310
5311@smallexample
7c9c73be 5312@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5313@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5314
252b5132
RH
5315When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5316symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5317requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5318shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5319loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5320linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5321application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5322way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5323all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5324search for each symbol reference.
5325
5326The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5327doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5328that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5329functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5330the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5331required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5332that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5333versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5334the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5335
5336There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5337first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5338source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5339script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5340maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5341@smallexample
5342__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5343@end smallexample
5344@noindent
5345in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5346be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5347The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5348@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5349takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5350
5351The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5352function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5353an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5354version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5355linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5356
5357To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5358source file. Here is an example:
5359
5360@smallexample
5361__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5362__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5363__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5364__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5365@end smallexample
5366
5367In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5368unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5369example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5370@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5371
5372When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5373some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5374this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5375@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5376declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5377you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5378
5379If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5380within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5381(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5382specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5383
cb840a31
L
5384You can also specify the language in the version script:
5385
5386@smallexample
5387VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5388@end smallexample
5389
c0065db7 5390The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5391The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5392demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5393patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5394@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5395
86043bbb
MM
5396Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5397described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5398or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5399the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5400whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5401cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5402might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5403should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5404expect when you upgrade.
5405
252b5132
RH
5406@node Expressions
5407@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5408@cindex expressions
5409@cindex arithmetic
5410The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5411that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5412expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5413host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5414
5415You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5416
5417The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5418expressions.
5419
5420@menu
5421* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5422* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5423* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5424* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5425* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5426* Operators:: Operators
5427* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5428* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5429* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5430@end menu
5431
5432@node Constants
5433@subsection Constants
5434@cindex integer notation
5435@cindex constants in linker scripts
5436All constants are integers.
5437
5438As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5439octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5440hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5441@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5442@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5443value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5444
5445@cindex scaled integers
5446@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5447@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5448@cindex suffixes for integers
5449@cindex integer suffixes
5450In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5451constant by
5452@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5453@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5454@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5455@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5456@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5457@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5458@tex
5459${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5460@end tex
5461@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5462respectively. For example, the following
5463all refer to the same quantity:
5464
252b5132 5465@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5466_fourk_1 = 4K;
5467_fourk_2 = 4096;
5468_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5469_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5470@end smallexample
5471
8a308ae8
NC
5472Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5473conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5474
0c71d759
NC
5475@node Symbolic Constants
5476@subsection Symbolic Constants
5477@cindex symbolic constants
5478@kindex CONSTANT
5479It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5480the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5481
5482@table @code
5483@item MAXPAGESIZE
5484@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5485The target's maximum page size.
5486
5487@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5488@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5489The target's default page size.
5490@end table
5491
5492So for example:
5493
5494@smallexample
9d5777a3 5495 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5496@end smallexample
5497
5498will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5499supported by the target.
5500
252b5132
RH
5501@node Symbols
5502@subsection Symbol Names
5503@cindex symbol names
5504@cindex names
5505@cindex quoted symbol names
5506@kindex "
5507Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5508and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5509Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5510specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5511keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5512@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5513"SECTION" = 9;
5514"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5515@end smallexample
5516
5517Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5518to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5519whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5520
ecca9871
L
5521@node Orphan Sections
5522@subsection Orphan Sections
5523@cindex orphan
5524Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5525are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5526script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5527output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5528placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5529attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5530same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5531If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5532at the end of the file.
5533
5534For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5535well as section flag.
5536
41911f68 5537If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5538the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5539__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5540section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5541orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5542representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5543character.
5544
252b5132
RH
5545@node Location Counter
5546@subsection The Location Counter
5547@kindex .
5548@cindex dot
5549@cindex location counter
5550@cindex current output location
5551The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5552current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5553location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5554within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5555anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5556
5557@cindex holes
5558Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5559moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5560location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5561and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5562doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5563
5564@smallexample
5565SECTIONS
5566@{
5567 output :
5568 @{
5569 file1(.text)
5570 . = . + 1000;
5571 file2(.text)
5572 . += 1000;
5573 file3(.text)
563e308f 5574 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5575@}
5576@end smallexample
5577@noindent
5578In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5579located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5580followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5581@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5582@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5583specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5584
5c6bbab8
NC
5585@cindex dot inside sections
5586Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5587current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5588statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5589absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5590however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5591not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5592
5593@smallexample
5594SECTIONS
5595@{
5596 . = 0x100
5597 .text: @{
5598 *(.text)
5599 . = 0x200
5600 @}
5601 . = 0x500
5602 .data: @{
5603 *(.data)
5604 . += 0x600
5605 @}
5606@}
5607@end smallexample
5608
5609The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5610and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5611the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5612much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5613move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5614and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5615the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5616the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5617
b5666f2f
AM
5618@cindex dot outside sections
5619Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5620output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5621needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5622
5623@smallexample
5624SECTIONS
5625@{
5626 start_of_text = . ;
5627 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5628 end_of_text = . ;
5629
5630 start_of_data = . ;
5631 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5632 end_of_data = . ;
5633@}
5634@end smallexample
5635
5636If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5637not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5638between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5639should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5640blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5641the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5642sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5643statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5644special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5645place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5646as follows:
5647
5648@smallexample
5649SECTIONS
5650@{
5651 start_of_text = . ;
5652 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5653 end_of_text = . ;
5654
5655 start_of_data = . ;
5656 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5657 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5658 end_of_data = . ;
5659@}
5660@end smallexample
5661
5662This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5663@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5664placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5665assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5666a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5667section. So you could write:
5668
5669@smallexample
5670SECTIONS
5671@{
5672 start_of_text = . ;
5673 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5674 end_of_text = . ;
5675
5676 . = . ;
5677 start_of_data = . ;
5678 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5679 end_of_data = . ;
5680@}
5681@end smallexample
5682
5683Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5684@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5685
252b5132
RH
5686@need 2000
5687@node Operators
5688@subsection Operators
5689@cindex operators for arithmetic
5690@cindex arithmetic operators
5691@cindex precedence in expressions
5692The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5693the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5694@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5695@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5696@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5697@smallexample
5698precedence associativity Operators Notes
5699(highest)
57001 left ! - ~ (1)
57012 left * / %
57023 left + -
57034 left >> <<
57045 left == != > < <= >=
57056 left &
57067 left |
57078 left &&
57089 left ||
570910 right ? :
571011 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5711(lowest)
5712@end smallexample
5713Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5714(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5715(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5716@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5717@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5718@tex
5719\vskip \baselineskip
5720%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5721\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5722\hrule
5723\halign
5724{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5725height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5726&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5727height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5728\noalign{\hrule}
5729height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5730&highest&&&&&\cr
5731% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5732&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5733&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5734&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5735&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5736&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5737&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5738&7&&left&&|&\cr
5739&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5740&9&&left&&||&\cr
5741&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5742&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5743&lowest&&&&&\cr
5744height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5745\hrule}
5746@end tex
5747@iftex
5748{
5749@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5750@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5751@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5752}
5753@end iftex
5754@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5755
5756@node Evaluation
5757@subsection Evaluation
5758@cindex lazy evaluation
5759@cindex expression evaluation order
5760The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5761an expression when absolutely necessary.
5762
5763The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5764address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5765regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5766as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5767
5768However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5769until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5770other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5771for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5772
5773The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5774assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5775allocation.
5776
5777Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5778@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5779
5780If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5781available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5782following
5783@smallexample
5784@group
5785SECTIONS
5786 @{
a1ab1d2a 5787 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5788 @{ *(.text) @}
5789 @}
5790@end group
5791@end smallexample
5792@noindent
5793will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5794address}.
5795
5796@node Expression Section
5797@subsection The Section of an Expression
5798@cindex expression sections
5799@cindex absolute expressions
5800@cindex relative expressions
5801@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5802@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5803@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5804Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5805relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5806using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5807value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5808symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5809operations.
5810
abf4be64
AM
5811Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5812section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5813address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5814@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5815functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5816One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5817(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5818differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5819versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5820section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5821Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5822absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5823given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5824everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5825
5826In the following simple example,
252b5132 5827
7542af2a
AM
5828@smallexample
5829@group
5830SECTIONS
5831 @{
5832 . = 0x100;
5833 __executable_start = 0x100;
5834 .data :
5835 @{
5836 . = 0x10;
5837 __data_start = 0x10;
5838 *(.data)
5839 @}
5840 @dots{}
5841 @}
5842@end group
5843@end smallexample
252b5132 5844
7542af2a
AM
5845both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5846address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5847@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5848section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5849
5c3049d2
AM
5850For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5851addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5852
5853@itemize @bullet
5854@item
c05f749e
AM
5855Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5856operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5857absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5858@item
7542af2a
AM
5859Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5860relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5861and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5862@item
c05f749e
AM
5863Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5864in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5865address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5866before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5867@end itemize
5868
5869The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5870
5871@itemize @bullet
5872@item
5873An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5874@item
5875The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5876@item
9bc8bb33 5877The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5878relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5879(after above conversions) is also a number.
5880@item
5881The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5882relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5883section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5884@item
5885The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5886conversions) is an absolute address.
5887@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5888
5889You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5890to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5891create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5892section @samp{.data}:
5893@smallexample
5894SECTIONS
5895 @{
5896 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5897 @}
5898@end smallexample
5899@noindent
5900If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5901@samp{.data} section.
5902
7542af2a
AM
5903Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5904particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5905
252b5132
RH
5906@node Builtin Functions
5907@subsection Builtin Functions
5908@cindex functions in expressions
5909The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5910use in linker script expressions.
5911
5912@table @code
5913@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5914@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5915@cindex expression, absolute
5916Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5917of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5918value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5919normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5920
5921@item ADDR(@var{section})
5922@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5923@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5924Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5925script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5926the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5927@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5928@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5929the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5930@smallexample
5931@group
5932SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5933 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5934 @{
252b5132
RH
5935 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5936 @dots{}
5937 @}
5938 .output :
5939 @{
5940 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5941 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5942 @}
5943@dots{} @}
5944@end group
5945@end smallexample
5946
876f4090
NS
5947@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5948@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5949@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5950@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5951@cindex round up location counter
5952@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5953@cindex round up expression
5954@cindex align expression
5955Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5956to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5957doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5958arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5959expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5960equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5961
5962Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5963next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5964variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5965input sections:
252b5132
RH
5966@smallexample
5967@group
5968SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5969 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5970 *(.data)
5971 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5972 @}
5973@dots{} @}
5974@end group
5975@end smallexample
5976@noindent
5977The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5978a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5979a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5980of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5981
5982The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5983
362c1d1a
NS
5984@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5985@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5986@cindex section alignment
5987Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5988been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5989evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5990the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5991value in that section.
5992@smallexample
5993@group
5994SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5995 .output @{
5996 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5997 @dots{}
5998 @}
5999@dots{} @}
6000@end group
6001@end smallexample
6002
252b5132
RH
6003@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6004@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6005This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6006scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6007section.
6008
2d20f7bf
JJ
6009@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6010@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6011This is equivalent to either
6012@smallexample
6013(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6014@end smallexample
6015or
6016@smallexample
6017(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6018@end smallexample
6019@noindent
6020depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6021for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6022@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6023If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6024memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6025bytes in the on-disk file.
6026
6027This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6028any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6029@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6030be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6031working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6032
6033@noindent
6034Example:
6035@smallexample
6036 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6037@end smallexample
6038
6039@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6040@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6041This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6042evaluation purposes.
6043
6044@smallexample
6045 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6046@end smallexample
6047
a4f5ad88
JJ
6048@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6049@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6050This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6051@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6052When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6053does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6054@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6055boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6056it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6057@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6058padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6059section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6060
6061@smallexample
6062 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6063@end smallexample
6064
252b5132
RH
6065@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6066@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6067@cindex symbol defaults
6068Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6069defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6070return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6071default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6072shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6073the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6074existed, its value is preserved:
6075
6076@smallexample
6077@group
6078SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6079 .text : @{
6080 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6081 @dots{}
6082 @}
6083 @dots{}
6084@}
6085@end group
6086@end smallexample
6087
3ec57632
NC
6088@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6089@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6090Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6091
252b5132
RH
6092@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6093@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6094@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6095Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6096Section LMA}).
6097
2e53f7d6
NC
6098@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6099@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6100Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6101@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6102
252b5132
RH
6103@kindex MAX
6104@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6105Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6106
6107@kindex MIN
6108@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6109Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6110
6111@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6112@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6113@cindex unallocated address, next
6114Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6115This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6116use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6117output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6118
3ec57632
NC
6119@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6120@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6121Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6122
ba916c8a
MM
6123@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6124@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6125Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6126value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6127@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6128will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6129can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6130``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6131name.
6132
252b5132
RH
6133@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6134@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6135@cindex section size
6136Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6137been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6138evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6139@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6140@smallexample
6141@group
6142SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6143 .output @{
6144 .start = . ;
6145 @dots{}
6146 .end = . ;
6147 @}
6148 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6149 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6150@dots{} @}
6151@end group
6152@end smallexample
6153
6154@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6155@itemx sizeof_headers
6156@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6157@cindex header size
6158Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6159information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6160this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6161choose, to facilitate paging.
6162
6163@cindex not enough room for program headers
6164@cindex program headers, not enough room
6165When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6166@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6167number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6168addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6169additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6170room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6171the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6172script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6173you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6174command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6175@end table
6176
6177@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6178@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6179@cindex implicit linker scripts
6180If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6181an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6182linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6183linker will report an error.
6184
6185An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6186
6187Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6188assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6189commands.
6190
6191Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6192at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6193read. This can affect archive searching.
6194
6195@ifset GENERIC
6196@node Machine Dependent
6197@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6198
6199@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6200@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6201sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6202functionality are not listed.
6203
6204@menu
36f63dca
NC
6205@ifset H8300
6206* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6207@end ifset
6208@ifset I960
6209* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6210@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6211@ifset M68HC11
6212* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6213@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6214@ifset ARM
6215* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6216@end ifset
6217@ifset HPPA
6218* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6219@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6220@ifset M68K
6221* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6222@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6223@ifset MIPS
6224* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6225@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6226@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6227* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6228@end ifset
2469cfa2 6229@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6230* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6231@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6232@ifset NDS32
6233* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6234@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6235@ifset NIOSII
6236* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6237@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6238@ifset POWERPC
6239* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6240@end ifset
6241@ifset POWERPC64
6242* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6243@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6244@ifset SPU
6245* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6246@end ifset
74459f0e 6247@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6248* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6249@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6250@ifset WIN32
6251* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6252@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6253@ifset XTENSA
6254* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6255@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6256@end menu
6257@end ifset
6258
252b5132
RH
6259@ifset H8300
6260@ifclear GENERIC
6261@raisesections
6262@end ifclear
6263
6264@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6265@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6266
6267@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6268For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6269you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6270
6271@table @emph
6272@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6273@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6274@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6275targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6276program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6277respectively.
6278
6279@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6280@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6281@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6282@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6283sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6284page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6285(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6286@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6287top page of memory).
1502569c 6288
81f5558e
NC
6289@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6290indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6291displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6292the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6293@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6294whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6295range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6296
1502569c 6297@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6298@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6299biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6300which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6301page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6302(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6303@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6304the top page of memory).
6305
6306@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6307@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
630832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6309changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6310(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6311@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6312the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6313@end table
6314
6315@ifclear GENERIC
6316@lowersections
6317@end ifclear
6318@end ifset
6319
36f63dca 6320@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6321@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6322@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6323@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6324@node Renesas
6325@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6326
c2dcd04e
NC
6327@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6328H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6329options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6330@end ifset
6331@end ifclear
6332
6333@ifset I960
6334@ifclear GENERIC
6335@raisesections
6336@end ifclear
6337
6338@node i960
6339@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6340
6341@cindex i960 support
6342
6343You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6344specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6345family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6346incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6347linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6348libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6349search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6350
6351For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6352well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6353paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6354the names
6355
6356@smallexample
6357@group
6358try
6359libtry.a
6360tryca
6361libtryca.a
6362@end group
6363@end smallexample
6364
6365@noindent
6366The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6367two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6368
6369You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6370the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6371use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6372specifies a library.
6373
6374@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6375@cindex relaxing on i960
6376@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6377you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6378@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6379them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6380instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6381instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6382target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6383not itself call any subroutines).
6384
6385@ifclear GENERIC
6386@lowersections
6387@end ifclear
6388@end ifset
6389
6390@ifset ARM
6391@ifclear GENERIC
6392@raisesections
6393@end ifclear
6394
93fd0973
SC
6395@ifset M68HC11
6396@ifclear GENERIC
6397@raisesections
6398@end ifclear
6399
6400@node M68HC11/68HC12
6401@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6402
6403@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6404
6405@subsection Linker Relaxation
6406
6407For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6408optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6409
6410@table @emph
6411@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6412@item relaxing address modes
6413@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6414targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6415program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6416respectively.
6417
6418@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6419transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6420page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6421
6422@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6423When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6424of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6425addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6426@code{bset} instructions.
6427
6428@end table
6429
6430@subsection Trampoline Generation
6431
6432@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6433@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6434For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6435call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6436will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6437trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6438case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6439point to the function trampoline.
6440
6441@ifclear GENERIC
6442@lowersections
6443@end ifclear
6444@end ifset
6445
36f63dca 6446@node ARM
3674e28a 6447@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6448
6449@cindex ARM interworking support
6450@kindex --support-old-code
6451For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6452between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6453been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6454line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6455libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6456option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6457given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6458which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6459the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6460non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6461
6462@cindex thumb entry point
6463@cindex entry point, thumb
6464@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6465The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6466@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6467But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6468branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6469executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6470
ce11ba6c
KT
6471@cindex PE import table prefixing
6472@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6473The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6474the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6475element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6476import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6477
e489d0ae
PB
6478@cindex BE8
6479@kindex --be8
6480The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6481executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6482objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6483option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6484little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6485
3674e28a
PB
6486@cindex TARGET1
6487@kindex --target1-rel
6488@kindex --target1-abs
6489The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6490@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6491or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6492and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6493
6494@cindex TARGET2
6495@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6496The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6497@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6498meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6499@table @samp
6500@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6501@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6502@item abs
6503@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6504@item got-rel
6505@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6506@end table
6507
319850b4
JB
6508@cindex FIX_V4BX
6509@kindex --fix-v4bx
6510The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6511specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6512interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6513also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6514
6515In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6516linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6517@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6518
6519In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6520relocations are ignored.
6521
845b51d6
PB
6522@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6523@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6524Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6525relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6526
6527@smallexample
6528TST rM, #1
6529MOVEQ PC, rM
6530BX Rn
6531@end smallexample
6532
6533This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6534and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6535condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6536
33bfe774
JB
6537@cindex USE_BLX
6538@kindex --use-blx
6539The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6540BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6541situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6542code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6543each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6544
6545This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6546specify it if you are using that target.
6547
c6dd86c6
JB
6548@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6549@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6550The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6551bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6552instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6553to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6554the support code can read the intended values.
6555
6556The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6557intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6558and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6559intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6560full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6561you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6562
6563If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6564enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6565@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6566mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6567vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6568@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6569
6570If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6571potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6572such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6573first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6574instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6575the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6576are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6577
2de70689
MGD
6578@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6579@kindex --fix-arm1176
6580@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6581The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6582in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6583are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6584unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6585
9d5777a3 6586Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6587Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6588http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6589
bf21ed78
MS
6590@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6591@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6592The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6593warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6594enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6595linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6596using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6597not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6598
6599@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6600@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6601The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6602warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6603@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6604linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6605using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6606
726150b7
NC
6607@cindex PIC_VENEER
6608@kindex --pic-veneer
6609The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6610ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6611is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6612@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6613
6614@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6615@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6616The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6617code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6618perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6619placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6620controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6621The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6622duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6623group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6624code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6625where they should be placed.
6626
6627The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6628@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6629placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6630branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6631placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6632value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6633exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6634A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6635linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6636from the input sections.
6637
6638The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6639@samp{N = +1}.
6640
1a51c1a4
NC
6641Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6642only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6643otherwise.
6644
1db37fe6
YG
6645@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6646@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6647@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6648The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6649
6650The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6651
68fcca92
JW
6652@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6653@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6654@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6655The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6656
6657Please contact ARM for further details.
6658
1db37fe6
YG
6659@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6660@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6661@cindex Merging exidx entries
6662The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6663
6664@kindex --long-plt
6665@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6666The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6667which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6668entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6669
36f63dca
NC
6670@ifclear GENERIC
6671@lowersections
6672@end ifclear
6673@end ifset
6674
6675@ifset HPPA
6676@ifclear GENERIC
6677@raisesections
6678@end ifclear
6679
6680@node HPPA ELF32
6681@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6682@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6683@kindex --multi-subspace
6684When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6685import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6686The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6687stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6688multiple sub-spaces.
6689
6690@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6691@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6692Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6693stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6694@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6695sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6696a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6697the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6698conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6699prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6700A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6701branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6702@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6703@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6704detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6705positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6706
6707Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6708single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6709create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6710large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6711
6712@ifclear GENERIC
6713@lowersections
6714@end ifclear
6715@end ifset
6716
7fb9f789
NC
6717@ifset M68K
6718@ifclear GENERIC
6719@raisesections
6720@end ifclear
6721
6722@node M68K
6723@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6724
6725@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6726@kindex --got=@var{type}
6727The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6728The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6729@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6730the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6731@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6732entries only at non-negative offsets.
6733@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6734entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6735support such GOTs.
6736@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6737output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6738file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6739files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6740
6741@ifclear GENERIC
6742@lowersections
6743@end ifclear
6744@end ifset
6745
833794fc
MR
6746@ifset MIPS
6747@ifclear GENERIC
6748@raisesections
6749@end ifclear
6750
6751@node MIPS
6752@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6753
6754@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6755@kindex --insn32
6756@kindex --no-insn32
6757The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6758microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6759in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6760used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6761or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6762including 16-bit ones where possible.
6763
6764@ifclear GENERIC
6765@lowersections
6766@end ifclear
6767@end ifset
6768
36f63dca
NC
6769@ifset MMIX
6770@ifclear GENERIC
6771@raisesections
6772@end ifclear
6773
6774@node MMIX
6775@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6776For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6777@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6778understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6779can translate between the two formats.
6780
6781There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6782Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6783registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6784equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6785@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6786global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6787this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6788symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6789
7a2de473
HPN
6790Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6791@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6792The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6793of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6794
6795Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6796are left out from an mmo file.
6797
6798@ifclear GENERIC
6799@lowersections
6800@end ifclear
6801@end ifset
6802
6803@ifset MSP430
6804@ifclear GENERIC
6805@raisesections
6806@end ifclear
6807
6808@node MSP430
6809@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6810For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6811will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6812just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6813
6814@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6815The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6816
6817@table @code
6818@item @samp{.vectors}
6819Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6820
6821@item @samp{.bootloader}
6822Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6823in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6824
6825@item @samp{.infomem}
6826Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6827this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6828
c0065db7 6829@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6830This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6831in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6832
6833@item @samp{.noinit}
6834Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6835
c0065db7 6836The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6837@end table
6838
6839@ifclear GENERIC
6840@lowersections
6841@end ifclear
6842@end ifset
6843
35c08157
KLC
6844@ifset NDS32
6845@ifclear GENERIC
6846@raisesections
6847@end ifclear
6848
6849@node NDS32
6850@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6851@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6852For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6853relaxes objects according to these options.
6854
6855@table @code
6856@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6857Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6858
6859@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6860Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6861
6862@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6863Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6864
6865@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6866Export the EX9 table after linking.
6867
6868@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6869Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6870
6871@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6872Update the existing EX9 table.
6873
6874@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6875Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6876
6877@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6878Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6879
6880@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6881Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6882
6883@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6884Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6885@end table
6886
6887@ifclear GENERIC
6888@lowersections
6889@end ifclear
6890@end ifset
6891
78058a5e
SL
6892@ifset NIOSII
6893@ifclear GENERIC
6894@raisesections
6895@end ifclear
6896
6897@node Nios II
6898@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6899@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6900@kindex --relax on Nios II
6901
6902Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6903transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6904which may result in @command{ld} giving
6905@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6906The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6907trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6908outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6909trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6910be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6911larger than 256MB.
6912
6913The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6914is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6915@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6916locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6917source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6918register as a temporary.
6919
6920Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6921relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6922option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6923
6924@ifclear GENERIC
6925@lowersections
6926@end ifclear
6927@end ifset
6928
2a60a7a8
AM
6929@ifset POWERPC
6930@ifclear GENERIC
6931@raisesections
6932@end ifclear
6933
6934@node PowerPC ELF32
6935@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6936@cindex PowerPC long branches
6937@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6938Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6939displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6940@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6941@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6942the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6943section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6944section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6945@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6946both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6947considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6948
6949@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6950@table @option
6951@cindex PowerPC PLT
6952@kindex --bss-plt
6953@item --bss-plt
6954Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6955generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6956the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6957writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6958@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6959PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6960compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6961BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6962
016687f8
AM
6963@kindex --secure-plt
6964@item --secure-plt
6965@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6966@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6967when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6968layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6969style BSS PLT.
6970
2a60a7a8
AM
6971@cindex PowerPC GOT
6972@kindex --sdata-got
6973@item --sdata-got
6974The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6975sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6976@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6977section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6978@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6979@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6980@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6981@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6982PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6983pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6984GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6985really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6986
6987@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6988@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6989@item --emit-stub-syms
6990This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6991symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6992
6993@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6994@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6995@item --no-tls-optimize
6996PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6997sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6998disable the optimization.
6999@end table
7000
7001@ifclear GENERIC
7002@lowersections
7003@end ifclear
7004@end ifset
7005
7006@ifset POWERPC64
7007@ifclear GENERIC
7008@raisesections
7009@end ifclear
7010
7011@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7012@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7013
7014@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7015@table @option
7016@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7017@kindex --stub-group-size
7018@item --stub-group-size
7019Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7020by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7021@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7022sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7023a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7024the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7025conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7026prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7027A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7028branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7029@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7030@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7031detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7032positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7033
7034Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7035single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7036create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7037large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7038
7039@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7040@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7041@item --emit-stub-syms
7042This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7043symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7044
7045@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7046@kindex --dotsyms
7047@kindex --no-dotsyms
7048@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7049These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7050in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7051function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7052code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7053properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7054to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7055@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7056dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7057feature.
7058
7059@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7060@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7061@item --no-tls-optimize
7062PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7063sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7064disable the optimization.
7065
7066@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7067@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7068@item --no-opd-optimize
7069PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7070corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7071the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7072Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7073
7074@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7075@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7076@item --non-overlapping-opd
7077Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7078@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7079the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7080entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7081
7082@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7083@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7084@item --no-toc-optimize
7085PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7086entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7087reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7088marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7089marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7090relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7091unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7092reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7093discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7094reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7095code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7096optimization.
7097
7098@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7099@kindex --no-multi-toc
7100@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7101If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7102@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7103where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7104entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7105total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7106grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7107TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7108calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7109help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
711064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7111Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7112
7113@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7114@kindex --no-toc-sort
7115@item --no-toc-sort
7116By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7117happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7118placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7119with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7120referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7121@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7122results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7123off this feature.
7124
7125@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7126@kindex --plt-align
7127@kindex --no-plt-align
7128@item --plt-align
7129@itemx --no-plt-align
7130Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7131padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7132specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7133that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7134stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7135
7136@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7137@kindex --plt-static-chain
7138@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7139@item --plt-static-chain
7140@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7141Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7142chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7143chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7144
7145@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7146@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7147@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7148@item --plt-thread-safe
7149@itemx --no-thread-safe
7150With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7151lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7152another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7153order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7154memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7155barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7156looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7157seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7158default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7159@end table
7160
7161@ifclear GENERIC
7162@lowersections
7163@end ifclear
7164@end ifset
7165
49fa1e15
AM
7166@ifset SPU
7167@ifclear GENERIC
7168@raisesections
7169@end ifclear
7170
7171@node SPU ELF
7172@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7173
7174@cindex SPU ELF options
7175@table @option
7176
7177@cindex SPU plugins
7178@kindex --plugin
7179@item --plugin
7180This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7181
7182@cindex SPU overlays
7183@kindex --no-overlays
7184@item --no-overlays
7185Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7186regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7187@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7188turns off all this special overlay handling.
7189
7190@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7191@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7192@item --emit-stub-syms
7193This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7194symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7195
7196@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7197@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7198@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7199This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7200function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7201on calls to non-overlay regions.
7202
7203@cindex SPU local store size
7204@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7205@item --local-store=lo:hi
7206@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7207the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7208range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7209
c0065db7 7210@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7211@kindex --stack-analysis
7212@item --stack-analysis
7213SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7214unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7215under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7216@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7217@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7218determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7219for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7220for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7221for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7222find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7223and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7224under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7225dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7226is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7227and calls will be given.
7228
c0065db7 7229@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7230@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7231@item --emit-stack-syms
7232This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7233in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7234These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7235functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7236functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7237such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7238The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7239@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7240@end table
7241
7242@ifclear GENERIC
7243@lowersections
7244@end ifclear
7245@end ifset
7246
36f63dca
NC
7247@ifset TICOFF
7248@ifclear GENERIC
7249@raisesections
7250@end ifclear
7251
7252@node TI COFF
7253@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7254@cindex TI COFF versions
7255@kindex --format=@var{version}
7256The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7257TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7258also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7259format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7260header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7261
7262@ifclear GENERIC
7263@lowersections
7264@end ifclear
7265@end ifset
7266
2ca22b03
NC
7267@ifset WIN32
7268@ifclear GENERIC
7269@raisesections
7270@end ifclear
7271
7272@node WIN32
7273@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7274
c0065db7 7275This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7276See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7277command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7278
7279@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7280@cindex import libraries
7281@item import libraries
69da35b5 7282The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7283libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7284regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7285archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7286support for creating such libraries provided with the
7287@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7288
c0065db7
RM
7289@item exporting DLL symbols
7290@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7291The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7292
7293@table @emph
7294@item using auto-export functionality
7295@cindex using auto-export functionality
7296By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7297which is controlled by the following command line options:
7298
0a5d968e
NC
7299@itemize
7300@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7301@item --exclude-symbols
7302@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7303@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7304@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7305@end itemize
7306
09e2aba4
DK
7307When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7308(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7309symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7310often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7311private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7312options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7313exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7314final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7315
7316If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7317command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7318if either of the following are true:
7319
7320@itemize
7321@item A DEF file is used.
7322@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7323@end itemize
dc8465bf 7324
c0065db7
RM
7325@item using a DEF file
7326@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7327Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7328an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7329exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7330name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7331command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7332
7333@example
7334gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7335@end example
7336
0a5d968e
NC
7337Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7338@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7339
dc8465bf
NC
7340Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7341
7342@example
4b5bd4e7 7343LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7344
7345EXPORTS
7346foo
7347bar
7348_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7349another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7350var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7351doo = foo == foo2
7352eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7353@end example
dc8465bf 7354
7fcab871 7355This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7356symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7357alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7358by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7359@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7360@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7361export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7362in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7363symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7364
6b31ad16
DS
7365The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7366name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7367the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7368
b45619c0
NC
7369When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7370library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7371@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7372executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7373
7374With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7375specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7376non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7377
7378If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7379or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7380filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7381
4b5bd4e7
DS
7382The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7383
7384@example
7385EXPORTS
7386 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7387 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7388 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7389@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7390
7391Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7392@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7393@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7394@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7395Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7396@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7397string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7398
7399The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7400
7401@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7402will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7403by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7404linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7405library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7406
7407@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7408The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7409the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7410@code{*_imp__foo}).
7411
7412@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7413well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7414read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7415variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7416the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7417extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7418application will behave unexpectedly.
7419
7420@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7421it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7422symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7423API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7424the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7425
4b5bd4e7
DS
7426See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7427other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7428
7429@cindex creating a DEF file
7430While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7431with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7432
7433@item Using decorations
7434@cindex Using decorations
7435Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7436itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7437declared as:
7438
7439@example
7440__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7441__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7442@end example
7443
7444All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7445any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7446this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7447the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7448
7449Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7450decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7451instead:
7452
7453@example
7454__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7455__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7456@end example
7457
c0065db7
RM
7458This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7459when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7460variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7461code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7462of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7463omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7464@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7465information.
c0065db7 7466@end table
dc8465bf 7467
2ca22b03
NC
7468@cindex automatic data imports
7469@item automatic data imports
7470The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7471by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7472compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7473issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7474code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7475c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7476initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7477decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7478platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7479command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7480The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7481suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7482trigger the feature's use.
7483
c0065db7 7484auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7485additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7486
c0065db7 7487"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7488documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7489
c0065db7
RM
7490The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7491occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7492One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7493below.
7494
7495@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7496For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7497object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7498offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7499field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7500in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7501without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7502The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7503references.
7504
c0065db7
RM
7505The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7506be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7507themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7508runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7509compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7510support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7511run without error on an older system.
7512
c0065db7
RM
7513@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7514enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7515
7516@cindex direct linking to a dll
7517@item direct linking to a dll
7518The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7519including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7520libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7521traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7522libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7523function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7524though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7525storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7526tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7527large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7528
c0065db7 7529Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7530@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7531of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7532perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7533select the dll instead of an import library.
7534
2ca22b03 7535
69da35b5
NC
7536For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7537to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7538
7539@example
45e948fe
NC
7540libxxx.dll.a
7541xxx.dll.a
7542libxxx.a
7543xxx.lib
69da35b5 7544cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7545libxxx.dll
7546xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7547@end example
7548
69da35b5
NC
7549before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7550
c0065db7
RM
7551(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7552where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7553@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7554file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7555@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7556
c0065db7
RM
7557Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7558@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7559was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7560various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7561could coexist on the same machine.
7562
2ca22b03
NC
7563The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7564applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7565libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7566
7567@example
7568bin/
7569 cygxxx.dll
7570lib/
7571 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7572 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7573@end example
7574
c0065db7
RM
7575Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7576done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7577
75781. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7579@example
7580gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7581@end example
2ca22b03 7582
69da35b5
NC
7583However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7584(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7585@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7586not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7587
2ca22b03
NC
75882. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7589directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7590should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7591making the app/dll.
7592
7593@example
7594ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7595@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7596
7597Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7598
7599@example
7600gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7601@end example
69da35b5
NC
7602
7603This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7604perfectly legal
7605
7606@example
7607bin/
7608 cygxxx-5.dll
7609lib/
c0065db7 7610 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7611@end example
7612
dc8465bf 7613Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7614even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7615@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7616
7617Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7618wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7619
76201. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7621work with auto-imported data.
7622
dc8465bf
NC
76232. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7624import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7625symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7626for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7627possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7628
45e948fe
NC
76293. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7630critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7631in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7632stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7633
69da35b5 7634So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7635true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7636a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7637binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7638massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7639requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7640will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7641
c0065db7 7642@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7643@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7644@item adding additional names
7645Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7646A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7647exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7648when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7649import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7650
c0065db7 7651@example
dc8465bf
NC
7652LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7653
7654EXPORTS
c0065db7 7655foo
dc8465bf 7656_foo = foo
c0065db7 7657@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7658
7659The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7660
7661Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7662source code using the "weak" attribute:
7663
c0065db7
RM
7664@example
7665void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7666void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7667@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7668
7669See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7670symbols.
7671
7672@item renaming symbols
7673Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7674kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7675@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7676DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7677created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7678
c0065db7 7679@example
dc8465bf
NC
7680LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7681
7682EXPORTS
7683_foo = foo
c0065db7 7684@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7685
7686The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7687@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7688@end table
dc8465bf 7689
0a5d968e 7690Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7691unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7692If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7693@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7694that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7695@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7696renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7697to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7698the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7699In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7700which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7701
7702@cindex weak externals
7703@item weak externals
7704The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7705weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7706defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7707are three variants of weak externals:
7708@itemize
7709@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7710called lazy externals.
7711@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7712This form is not presently implemented.
7713@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7714implemented.
7715@end itemize
7716As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7717are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7718uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7719
7720@cindex aligned common symbols
7721@item aligned common symbols
7722As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7723desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7724the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7725carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7726by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7727tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7728but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7729warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7730
2ca22b03
NC
7731@end table
7732
7733@ifclear GENERIC
7734@lowersections
7735@end ifclear
7736@end ifset
7737
e0001a05
NC
7738@ifset XTENSA
7739@ifclear GENERIC
7740@raisesections
7741@end ifclear
7742
7743@node Xtensa
7744@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7745
7746@cindex Xtensa processors
7747The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7748@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7749specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7750keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7751example, with the command:
7752
7753@smallexample
7754SECTIONS
7755@{
7756 .text : @{
7757 *(.literal .text)
7758 @}
7759@}
7760@end smallexample
7761
7762@noindent
7763@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7764and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7765literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7766interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7767group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7768files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7769and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7770
43cd72b9 7771@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7772@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7773Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7774provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7775is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7776literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7777will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7778location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7779the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7780unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7781@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7782range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7783
7784For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7785to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7786instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7787instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7788instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7789@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7790hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7791By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7792switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7793density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7794instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7795performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7796linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7797a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7798
7799The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7800control the linker:
7801
7802@cindex Xtensa options
7803@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7804@item --size-opt
7805When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7806more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7807no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7808alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7809preserve the correctness of the code.
7810@end table
e0001a05
NC
7811
7812@ifclear GENERIC
7813@lowersections
7814@end ifclear
7815@end ifset
7816
252b5132
RH
7817@ifclear SingleFormat
7818@node BFD
7819@chapter BFD
7820
7821@cindex back end
7822@cindex object file management
7823@cindex object formats available
7824@kindex objdump -i
7825The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7826These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7827object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7828format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7829it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7830associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7831object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7832(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7833list all the formats available for your configuration.
7834
7835@cindex BFD requirements
7836@cindex requirements for BFD
7837As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7838several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7839BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7840formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7841been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7842BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7843may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7844
7845One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7846mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7847useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7848conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7849
7850@menu
7851* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7852@end menu
7853
7854@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7855@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7856@cindex opening object files
7857@include bfdsumm.texi
7858@end ifclear
7859
7860@node Reporting Bugs
7861@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7862@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7863@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7864
ff5dcc92 7865Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7866
7867Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7868it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7869to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7870work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7871@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7872
7873In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7874information that enables us to fix the bug.
7875
7876@menu
7877* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7878* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7879@end menu
7880
7881@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7882@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7883@cindex bug criteria
7884
7885If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7886
7887@itemize @bullet
7888@cindex fatal signal
7889@cindex linker crash
7890@cindex crash of linker
7891@item
7892If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7893@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7894
7895@cindex error on valid input
7896@item
ff5dcc92 7897If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7898
7899@cindex invalid input
7900@item
ff5dcc92 7901If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7902may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7903object files are correct.
7904
7905@item
7906If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7907improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7908@end itemize
7909
7910@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7911@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7912@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7913@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7914
7915A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7916products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7917recommend you contact that organization first.
7918
7919You can find contact information for many support companies and
7920individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7921distribution.
7922
ad22bfe8 7923@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7924Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7925@value{BUGURL}.
7926@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7927
7928The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7929@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7930fact or leave it out, state it!
7931
7932Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7933problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7934assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7935matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7936the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7937location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7938were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7939into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7940specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7941and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7942
7943Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7944the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7945on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7946
7947Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7948bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7949respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7950You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7951
7952To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7953
7954@itemize @bullet
7955@item
ff5dcc92 7956The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7957the @samp{--version} argument.
7958
7959Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7960the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7961
7962@item
ff5dcc92 7963Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7964patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7965
7966@item
7967The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7968version number.
7969
7970@item
ff5dcc92 7971What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7972``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7973
7974@item
7975The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7976observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7977list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7978sufficient.
7979
7980If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7981and then we might not encounter the bug.
7982
7983@item
7984A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7985bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7986provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7987bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7988state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7989requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7990we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7991attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7992
7993If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7994@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7995object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7996@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7997how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7998
7999@item
8000A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8001incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8002
ff5dcc92 8003Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8004will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8005not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8006a chance to make a mistake.
8007
8008Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8009say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8010copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8011C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8012and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8013fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8014you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8015any conclusion from our observations.
8016
8017@item
ff5dcc92 8018If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8019diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8020@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8021If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8022context, not by line number.
8023
8024The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8025sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8026@end itemize
8027
8028Here are some things that are not necessary:
8029
8030@itemize @bullet
8031@item
8032A description of the envelope of the bug.
8033
8034Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8035which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8036changes will not affect it.
8037
8038This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8039will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8040with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8041We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8042
8043Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8044of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8045output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8046less time, and so on.
8047
8048However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8049report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8050
8051@item
8052A patch for the bug.
8053
8054A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8055the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8056a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8057to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8058
ff5dcc92 8059Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8060construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8061through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8062able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8063fixed.
8064
8065And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8066patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8067help us to understand.
8068
8069@item
8070A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8071
8072Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8073things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8074@end itemize
8075
8076@node MRI
8077@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8078@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8079To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8080linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8081alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8082described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8083simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8084@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8085linker commands; these commands are described here.
8086
8087In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8088file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8089features to make use of them.
8090
8091You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8092@samp{-c} command-line option.
8093
8094Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8095command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8096blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8097MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8098issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8099
8100Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8101
8102You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8103lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8104The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8105
8106@table @code
8107@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8108@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8109@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8110Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8111the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8112@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8113your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8114script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8115commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8116input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8117@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8118
8119@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8120@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8121Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8122in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8123
8124@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8125
8126@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8127@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8128Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8129@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8130
8131@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8132@item BASE @var{expression}
8133Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8134absolute addresses) in the output file.
8135
8136@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8137@item CHIP @var{expression}
8138@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8139This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8140
8141@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8142@item END
8143This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8144
8145@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8146@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8147Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8148language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8149
8150@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8151@item
252b5132
RH
8152S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8153
8154@item
8155IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8156
8157@item
8158COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8159@samp{COFF}
8160@end enumerate
8161
8162@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8163@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8164Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8165@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8166
8167The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8168same line, with no change in its effect.
8169
8170@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8171@item LOAD @var{filename}
8172@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8173Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8174same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8175command line.
8176
8177@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8178@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8179@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8180MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8181option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8182
8183@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8184@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8185@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8186Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8187order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8188script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8189sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8190file, in the order specified.
8191
8192@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8193@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8194@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8195@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8196Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8197@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8198
8199@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8200@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8201@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8202@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8203You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8204specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8205If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8206@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8207@end table
8208
793c5807
NC
8209@node GNU Free Documentation License
8210@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8211@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8212
370b66a1
CD
8213@node LD Index
8214@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8215
8216@printindex cp
8217
8218@tex
7ca01ed9 8219% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8220% meantime:
8221\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8222\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8223\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8224\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8225\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8226\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8227\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8228\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8229\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8230% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8231@end tex
8232
252b5132 8233@bye
This page took 1.202957 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.